]> code.delx.au - gnu-emacs/blob - etc/NEWS
*** empty log message ***
[gnu-emacs] / etc / NEWS
1 GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 5 Jan 2000
2 Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3 See the end for copying conditions.
4
5 Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
6 For older news, see the file ONEWS.
7
8 \f
9 * Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
10
11 ** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
12 the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
13
14 ** There are new configure options associated with the support for
15 images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure'
16 to list them.
17
18 ** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs
19 Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if they these are available.
20 \f
21 * Changes in Emacs 21.1
22
23 ** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not
24 displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the
25 menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode
26 menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu.
27
28 ** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable because it contains
29 a version-dependent component.
30
31 ** The <delete> function key is now bound to `delete-char' by default.
32 Note that this takes effect only on window systems. On TTYs, Emacs
33 will receive ASCII 127 when the DEL key is pressed. This
34 character is still bound as before.
35
36 ** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set
37 using that menu.
38
39 ** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is
40 suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to executable-chmod.
41
42 ** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if
43 buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer
44 contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or
45 by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and
46 insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment,
47 the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding.
48 Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system.
49
50 ** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs'
51 coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's
52 escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores
53 such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is
54 recommended not to change it except for the special case that you
55 always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to
56 read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c
57 (`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1
58 RET C-x C-f filename RET.
59
60 ** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the
61 environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'.
62
63 ** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at
64 point in a pop-up window.
65
66 ** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and
67 displays all characters in that character set.
68
69 ** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based
70 coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8.
71
72 ** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based
73 on the context.
74
75 ** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
76
77 ** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
78 been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
79
80 ** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
81 `display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
82 indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
83 indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
84
85 ** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
86 sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
87 (On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
88 You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location.
89
90 ** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
91 on the display using several methods
92
93 - By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
94 a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
95 be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
96
97 - By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
98 equivalent ot specifying the frame parameter.
99
100 - By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
101
102 - By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
103 the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
104
105 ** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create
106 an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
107 command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
108 does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
109
110 ** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
111 `make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
112 typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
113
114 ** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
115 characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
116
117 ** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
118 compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
119 this behavior.
120
121 The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte
122 compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
123 Emacs dump core.
124
125 ** New X resources recognized
126
127 *** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
128 whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
129 is useful for debugging X problems.
130
131 Example:
132
133 emacs.synchronous: true
134
135 *** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
136 visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
137 the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
138 and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
139 visual class names are
140
141 TrueColor
142 PseudoColor
143 DirectColor
144 StaticColor
145 GrayScale
146 StaticGray
147
148 Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
149 `pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
150 meaning.
151
152 The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
153 supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
154 `visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
155 visual.
156
157 Example:
158
159 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
160
161 *** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
162 specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
163 default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
164 resource values are `true' or `on'.
165
166 Example:
167
168 emacs.privateColormap: true
169
170 ** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
171 more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
172 now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
173
174 ** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to
175 display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is
176 shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can
177 be customized.
178
179 ** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
180
181 ** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
182 all frames except the selected one.
183
184 ** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
185 to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
186
187 ** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
188 the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X either in the echo
189 area or with tooltips.
190
191 ** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
192 read mail from the menu etc.
193
194 ** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
195 a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
196
197 ** Changes in Texinfo mode.
198
199 ** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
200 macros
201
202 Key binding Macro
203 -------------------------
204 C-c C-c C-s @strong
205 C-c C-c C-e @emph
206 C-c C-c u @url
207 C-c C-c q @quotation
208 C-c C-c m @email
209
210 ** Changes in Outline mode.
211
212 There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
213 `outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
214 the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
215
216 ** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
217 groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
218
219 ** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either M-x clone-buffer
220 or C-u m <entry> RET. M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and
221 several other special buffers.
222
223 ** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
224 under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your
225 .emacs file.
226
227 The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount'
228 determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
229
230 ** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
231 abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
232 `directory-abbrev-alist'.
233
234 ** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
235 is running in batch mode. For example,
236
237 (message "%s" (read t))
238
239 will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
240 to standard output.
241
242 ** Faces and frame parameters.
243
244 There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
245 Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
246 `scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
247 `scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
248 sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
249 for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
250 parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
251
252 Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
253 `default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
254 `foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
255 `default' face and vice versa.
256
257 ** New face `menu'.
258
259 The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
260 Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
261 attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
262
263 ** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
264
265 The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
266 colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
267 correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
268 the screen gamma of a frame's display.
269
270 PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
271 in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
272 color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
273
274 The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
275 `ScreenGamma'.
276
277 ** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
278
279 The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
280 Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
281 oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
282 of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
283 the text.
284
285 ** Emacs has a new face implementation.
286
287 The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
288 font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
289 height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
290 These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
291 specify a font.
292
293 Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
294 These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
295 under Lisp changes, below.
296
297 ** New default font is Courier 12pt.
298
299 ** When using a windowing terminal, Emacs window now has a cursor of
300 its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid; otherwise,
301 it is hollow.
302
303 ** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
304 truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
305 foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
306 customizing face `fringe'.
307
308 ** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. You
309 can change its appearance by modifying the face `modeline'.
310
311 ** LessTif support.
312
313 Emacs now runs with LessTif (see <http://www.lesstif.org>). You will
314 need a version 0.88.1 or later.
315
316 ** Toolkit scroll bars.
317
318 Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
319 LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
320 configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
321 bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
322 bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
323 Emacs.
324
325 When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
326 Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
327 Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
328 Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
329 define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
330 `s/freebsd.h' as an example.
331
332 Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
333 a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
334 directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
335 different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
336 system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
337 add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
338
339 The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
340 `float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
341 This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
342 image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
343 Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
344
345 ** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
346
347 When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
348 widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
349 Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
350
351 ** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
352
353 When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
354 whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
355 defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
356 highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
357 displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
358 whitespace.
359
360 ** Busy-cursor.
361
362 Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
363 display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
364
365 ** Blinking cursor
366
367 M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
368 terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
369 and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
370 the group `cursor'.
371
372 ** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
373
374 This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
375 generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
376 See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
377 details.
378
379 Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
380 have to do anything to activate it.
381
382 ** Tabs and variable-width text.
383
384 Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
385 defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
386 independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
387 Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
388
389 ** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
390
391 *** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
392
393 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
394
395 The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
396 LessTif/Motif one.
397
398 *** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
399 LessTif and Motif.
400
401 ** Hscrolling in C code.
402
403 Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
404 `automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
405 customized.
406
407 ** Tool bar support.
408
409 Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
410 how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level changes.
411
412 ** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
413
414 Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
415 mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
416 line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
417 about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
418 in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
419
420 Currently, the following actions have been defined:
421
422 - Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
423 buffers.
424
425 - Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
426 M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
427
428 - Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
429
430 - Mouse-2 on the read-only status in the mode line (`%' or `*')
431 toggles the read-only status.
432
433 - Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu.
434
435 ** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
436
437 When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
438 from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
439 non-nil.
440
441 ** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
442
443 Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
444 Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
445 the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
446 italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
447 Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
448 attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored
449 on terminals.
450
451 ** Sound support
452
453 Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware
454 driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently
455 supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au).
456
457 ** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
458 the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
459 forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
460 value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
461 users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
462 even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
463
464 The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
465
466 ** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
467
468 As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
469 drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
470 `x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
471
472 ** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
473 bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
474
475 This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
476 `indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
477 variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
478
479 ** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
480
481 When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
482 value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggessively' is a
483 number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
484 fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
485
486 When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
487 value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
488 number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
489 fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
490
491 ** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
492 notably at the end of lines.
493
494 All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
495 spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
496
497 There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle.
498
499 ** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
500 query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
501 after each match to get the replacement text.
502
503 ** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets
504 you edit the replacement string.
505
506 ** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB', let's
507 you complete mail aliases in the text, analogous to
508 lisp-complete-symbol.
509
510 ** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
511
512 If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are
513 longer than one line, Emacs now resizes the minibuffer window unless
514 it is on a frame of its own. You can control the maximum minibuffer
515 window size by setting the following variable:
516
517 - User option: max-mini-window-height
518
519 Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
520 fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
521 specifies a number of lines. If nil, don't resize.
522
523 Default is 0.25.
524
525 ** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history.
526
527 ** Changes to hideshow.el
528
529 Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block
530 selection and traversal and includes more isearch support.
531
532 *** Generalized block selection and traversal
533
534 A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps
535 (both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying
536 which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a
537 `forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts
538 point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func'
539 (which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp').
540
541 If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero,
542 i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is
543 backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see
544 the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details.
545
546 *** Isearch support for updating mode line
547
548 During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden
549 blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the
550 line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden
551 portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block
552 is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil.
553
554 To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include
555 something like this in your .emacs.
556
557 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook
558 (lambda ()
559 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline)))
560
561 ** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
562
563 If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes an
564 entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
565 log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
566
567 New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the current
568 buffer, fixing old-style date formats if necessary.
569
570 Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log entries
571 if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
572
573 The search for a file's version number is performed based on regular
574 expressions from `change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be
575 cutomized. Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of
576 a file.
577
578 ** Changes in Font Lock
579
580 *** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
581 font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major
582 mode.
583
584 ** Comint (subshell) changes
585
586 Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
587 and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
588
589 The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
590 buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
591 buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
592
593 The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
594 M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
595 the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
596
597 Packages based on comint.el like shell-mode, and
598 scheme-interaction-mode now highlight user input, and support choosing
599 previous input with mouse-2. To control this feature, see the
600 user-option `comint-highlight-input'.
601
602 ** Changes to Rmail mode
603
604 *** The new user-option rmail-rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
605 set to fine tune the identification of of the correspondent when
606 receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
607 recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
608 `user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
609 as correspondent.
610
611 Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
612 mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
613 regexp matching your mail addresses.
614
615 *** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
616 to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
617 Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
618 with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
619 for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
620
621 *** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
622 like `j'.
623
624 *** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
625 specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
626 digest message.
627
628 *** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies
629 in which folder to put messages automatically.
630
631 ** Changes to TeX mode
632
633 The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
634 `latex-mode'.
635
636 ** Changes to RefTeX mode
637
638 *** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
639 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
640 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
641 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
642 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
643 can be edited from that buffer.
644
645 *** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
646 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
647 `A' to use all marked entries).
648
649 *** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
650 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
651
652 *** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
653 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
654 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
655 been cited.
656
657 ** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
658 The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
659 semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
660 in column 1 are always made leaves.
661
662 ** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
663 has the following new features:
664
665 *** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
666 may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
667 to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
668 time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
669
670 *** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
671 feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
672 file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
673 compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
674 pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
675 defaults to 1.
676
677 ** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in
678 file names.
679
680 ** Tooltips.
681
682 Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
683 mouse position. To use them, use the Lisp package `tooltip' which you
684 can access via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
685
686 Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
687 variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
688 the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
689 tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
690
691 ** Customize changes
692
693 *** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
694 `State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will
695 cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs.
696
697 *** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
698 Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
699 default).
700
701 *** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
702 between custom options. Example:
703
704 (defcustom default-input-method nil
705 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
706 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
707 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
708 :group 'mule
709 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
710 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
711
712 This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
713 current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
714 first in a custom-set-variables statement.
715
716 ** New features in evaluation commands
717
718 *** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
719 modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
720 print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
721 customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
722 eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
723
724 *** The function `eval-defun' (M-C-x) now loads Edebug and instruments
725 code when called with a prefix argument.
726
727 ** Dired changes
728
729 *** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
730 command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
731 is, delete only empty directories.
732
733 *** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
734 command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
735 copy directories recursively.
736
737 *** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
738 in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
739 the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
740
741 *** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a')
742 replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or
743 directory.
744
745 *** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `w') shows
746 a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on.
747 This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so
748 will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as
749 accurate or inaccurate as it is.
750
751 ** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
752 use the -f option when sending mail.
753
754 ** CC mode changes.
755
756 Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
757 current user setups (although it's believed that these
758 incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
759 However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
760 back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
761 compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
762 release.
763
764 *** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t.
765 This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior
766 of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for
767 non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might
768 want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't
769 have to bother.
770
771 Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing
772 situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally
773 and edit both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session.
774 If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of
775 the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java"
776 by default) to override the global settings made by the user.
777
778 *** New initialization procedure for the style system.
779 When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
780 variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
781 take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
782 is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
783 settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
784 possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
785 Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
786
787 By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
788 special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
789 the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
790 of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
791 above.
792
793 Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
794 when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
795 function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
796 call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
797 then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
798 values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
799 only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
800 function documentation for more info.
801
802 The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
803 especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
804 with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
805 intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
806 such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
807 is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
808 configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
809 global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
810
811 (Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
812
813 **** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
814 This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
815
816 This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
817 variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
818 completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
819 the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
820 empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
821 style system.
822
823 **** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
824 In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
825 c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
826 as far as possible.
827
828 *** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
829 CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
830 surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
831 chapter about this in the manual.
832
833 **** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
834 The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
835 recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
836 primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
837 adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
838
839 **** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
840 This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
841 c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
842
843 **** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
844 This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
845
846 It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
847 Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
848 A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
849 inside CC Mode.
850
851 Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
852 causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
853 the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
854 available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
855 cc-mode/).
856
857 **** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
858 The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
859 specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
860 literals.
861
862 **** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
863 It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
864 prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
865 you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
866 this function.
867
868 *** Fixes to IDL mode.
869 It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
870 to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
871 struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
872 Thanks to Eric Eide.
873
874 *** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
875 It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
876 opening braces hangs and when they don't.
877
878 **** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
879
880 *** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
881 See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
882 better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
883 and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
884
885 *** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
886 previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
887 the column specified by comment-column.
888
889 *** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
890 In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
891 is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
892 prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
893 contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
894 don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
895
896 *** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
897 instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
898 arguments.
899
900 *** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
901
902 *** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
903 c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
904 c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
905 variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
906 Provan).
907
908 *** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
909
910 ** Makefile mode changes
911
912 *** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
913
914 *** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
915 Fontlock mode is active.
916
917 ** Isearch changes
918
919 ** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
920 respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
921 that started the search.
922
923 *** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
924 selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
925
926 *** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
927
928 Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
929 `isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
930 search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
931 before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
932 highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
933 `secondary-selection'.
934
935 The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
936 will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
937 Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
938 using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
939 usual snappy response.
940
941 If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
942 matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
943 set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
944 isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
945
946 ** Changes in sort.el
947
948 The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
949 as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
950 new user-option sort-numberic-base can be used to specify a default
951 numeric base.
952
953 ** Changes to Ange-ftp
954
955 *** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
956 names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
957 sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
958
959 *** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
960 ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
961
962 ** Shell script mode changes.
963
964 Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
965 derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
966 sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
967
968 ** Etags changes.
969
970 *** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
971
972 *** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
973 possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
974 {lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
975 This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
976 a regular expression. The manual contains details.
977
978 *** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
979 declarations when given the --declarations option.
980
981 *** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
982 "operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
983
984 *** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
985 types.
986
987 *** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged.
988
989 *** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
990
991 *** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
992 are now tagged.
993
994 *** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
995 variables are tagged.
996
997 *** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
998
999 *** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
1000 for PSWrap.
1001
1002 ** Changes in etags.el
1003
1004 *** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
1005 tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
1006 is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
1007
1008 *** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
1009 the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
1010
1011 If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
1012 FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
1013 TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
1014 obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
1015
1016 TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
1017
1018 FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
1019 List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
1020
1021 A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
1022
1023 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
1024 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
1025 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
1026
1027 *** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
1028 of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
1029
1030 *** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
1031 names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
1032
1033 ** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
1034 and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
1035 LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
1036
1037 ** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
1038 Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets
1039 8859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign).
1040 There is currently no specific input method support for them.
1041
1042 ** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to
1043 remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
1044 appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
1045
1046 ** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
1047
1048 ** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
1049
1050 ** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignore-regexps'
1051 containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
1052 expression from that list, are not checked.
1053
1054 ** New modes and packages
1055
1056 *** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML
1057 parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however.
1058
1059 *** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el
1060 package which allows different styles of comment-region and should
1061 be more robust while offering the same functionality.
1062
1063 *** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
1064 facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
1065 separate Texinfo file.
1066
1067 *** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine
1068 or by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
1069 provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS.
1070 It comes with log-view-mode to view RCS and SCCS logs and log-edit-mode
1071 used to enter checkin log messages.
1072
1073 *** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
1074 without invoking external programs.
1075
1076 The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
1077 and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
1078 `manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
1079 is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
1080 Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available.
1081
1082 The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
1083 page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
1084
1085 *** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
1086 authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
1087
1088 The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
1089 the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
1090 the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
1091 Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
1092 even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
1093 single step.
1094
1095 On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
1096 matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
1097 probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
1098 contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
1099
1100 *** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
1101 unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
1102 actually modifying content of a buffer.
1103
1104 *** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
1105 PostScript.
1106
1107 Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
1108
1109 The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
1110
1111 ; comment (until end of line)
1112 A non-terminal
1113 "C" terminal
1114 ?C? special
1115 $A default non-terminal
1116 $"C" default terminal
1117 $?C? default special
1118 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
1119 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
1120 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
1121 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
1122 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
1123 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
1124 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
1125 C+ one or more occurrences of C
1126 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
1127 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
1128 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
1129 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
1130 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
1131 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1132 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1133
1134 Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
1135
1136 *** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
1137 align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
1138 determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
1139 example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
1140 equal signs of assignments.
1141
1142 *** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
1143 paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
1144
1145 *** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
1146 list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
1147 buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to
1148 customize the package.
1149
1150 *** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp.
1151
1152 *** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
1153 replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
1154 is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
1155 and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
1156 not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
1157 which answers different needs.
1158
1159 *** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
1160 suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
1161 expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
1162 course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
1163 reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
1164 to be enabled.
1165
1166 *** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
1167 containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
1168
1169 *** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
1170
1171 *** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
1172
1173 *** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
1174
1175 *** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
1176 Pascal) language.
1177
1178 *** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
1179 the text at point.
1180
1181 *** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
1182
1183 *** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
1184
1185 *** whitespace.el ???
1186
1187 *** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
1188 files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
1189 (very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
1190 interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
1191 often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
1192 uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
1193 codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
1194
1195 *** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
1196
1197 Here is an example of columns:
1198
1199 horse apple bus
1200 dog pineapple car EXTRA
1201 porcupine strawberry airplane
1202
1203 Doing the following settings:
1204
1205 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
1206 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
1207 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
1208 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
1209
1210
1211 Selecting the lines above and typing:
1212
1213 M-x delimit-columns-region
1214
1215 It results:
1216
1217 [ horse , apple , bus , ]
1218 [ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
1219 [ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
1220
1221 delim-col has the following options:
1222
1223 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
1224 before all columns.
1225
1226 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
1227 between each column.
1228
1229 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
1230 after all columns.
1231
1232 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
1233 each column.
1234
1235 delim-col has the following commands:
1236
1237 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
1238 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
1239
1240 *** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that
1241 were operated on recently.
1242
1243 M-x recentf-mode RET toggles recentf mode.
1244
1245 M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET can be used to enable
1246 recentf at Emacs startup.
1247
1248 M-x customize-variable RET recentf-menu-filter RET to specify a menu
1249 filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the recent
1250 file list can be displayed:
1251
1252 - organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules.
1253 - sorted by file pathes, file names, ascending or descending.
1254 - showing pathes relative to the current default-directory
1255
1256 The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to
1257 dynamically change the menu appearance.
1258
1259 *** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
1260 text.
1261
1262 *** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
1263 of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
1264 specific to Message mode.
1265
1266 *** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
1267 viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
1268 with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
1269
1270 *** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
1271 interface to access directory servers using different directory
1272 protocols. It has a separate manual.
1273
1274 *** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
1275 for Autoconf, selected automatically.
1276
1277 *** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
1278
1279 *** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
1280 minibuffer with completion.
1281
1282 *** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
1283 with the diary features.
1284
1285 *** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
1286 numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
1287
1288 *** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto
1289 Fill mode.
1290
1291 ** Withdrawn packages
1292
1293 *** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
1294 functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
1295
1296 *** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
1297
1298 *** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
1299
1300 \f
1301 * Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual,
1302 (Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.)
1303
1304 ** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string
1305 without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may
1306 convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary.
1307
1308 ** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function
1309 or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string.
1310
1311 ** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the
1312 function was declared obsolete.
1313
1314 ** Function plist-member is renamed from widget-plist-member (which is
1315 retained as an alias).
1316
1317 ** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs.
1318 It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result
1319 is automatically converted to Emacs' form.
1320
1321 ** The new function `window-list' has been defined
1322
1323 - Function: window-list &optional WINDOW MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES
1324
1325 Return a list of windows in canonical order. The parameters WINDOW,
1326 MINIBUF and ALL-FRAMES are defined like for `next-window'.
1327
1328 ** There's a new function `some-window' defined as follows
1329
1330 - Function: some-window PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT
1331
1332 Return a window satisfying PREDICATE.
1333
1334 This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows',
1335 calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as
1336 argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil
1337 value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is
1338 returned.
1339
1340 Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even
1341 if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff
1342 it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the
1343 minibuffer even if it is active.
1344
1345 Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer
1346 counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count
1347 too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame
1348 and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts,
1349 `walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you
1350 entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window.
1351
1352 ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument.
1353 ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above.
1354 ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames.
1355 ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames.
1356 ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames.
1357 If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame.
1358 Anything else means restrict to the selected frame.
1359
1360 ** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key
1361 and event names in angle brackets.
1362
1363 ** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a
1364 call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that
1365 message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x.
1366 Default value is nil.
1367
1368 ** The user option line-number-display-limit can now be set to nil,
1369 meaning no limit.
1370
1371 ** select-safe-coding-system now also checks the most preferred
1372 coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and
1373 DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified,
1374
1375 ** The function `subr-arity' provides information on the argument list
1376 of a primitive.
1377
1378 ** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the
1379 buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property.
1380 This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather
1381 than replacing the local map.
1382
1383 ** The obsolete variables before-change-function and
1384 after-change-function are no longer acted upon and have been removed.
1385
1386 ** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'.
1387
1388 ** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments, as
1389 promised long ago.
1390
1391 \f
1392 * Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
1393
1394 Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
1395 --- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
1396 When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
1397 so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
1398
1399 *** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include
1400 `eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list
1401 when it finds 8-bit characters. Previously, it included `ascii' in a
1402 multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer.
1403
1404 *** The functions `set-buffer-modified', `string-as-multibyte' and
1405 `string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer if it
1406 contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set.
1407
1408 *** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is
1409 changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern
1410 [\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character
1411 regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if
1412 the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the
1413 extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra
1414 bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset
1415 eight-bit-graphic.
1416
1417 ** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables.
1418
1419 A fontset can now be specified for for each independent character, for
1420 a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a
1421 character set as previously.
1422
1423 *** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed.
1424 They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function
1425 modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER.
1426
1427 CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic
1428 characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the
1429 range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that
1430 case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset.
1431
1432 FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family
1433 name of a font and REGSITRY is a registry name of a font.
1434
1435 *** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset
1436 registries of character sets are set in the default fontset
1437 "fontset-default".
1438
1439 *** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second
1440 argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets.
1441
1442 ** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character
1443 composition is done by a special text property `composition' in
1444 buffers and strings.
1445
1446 *** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite
1447 character' which is an independent character with a unique character
1448 code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters'
1449 have been deleted: composite-char-component,
1450 composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule,
1451 composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete.
1452 The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have
1453 also been deleted.
1454
1455 *** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to
1456 specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable
1457 `reference-point-alist' for more detail.
1458
1459 *** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and
1460 MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a
1461 composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters
1462 may differ between buffer and string text.
1463
1464 *** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END,
1465 COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC.
1466
1467 *** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition'
1468 directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string.
1469 Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property
1470 `composition' from STRING.
1471
1472 *** The new function `find-composition' returns information about
1473 a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string.
1474
1475 *** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as
1476 obsolete.
1477
1478 ** The new character set `mule-unicode-0100-24ff' is introduced for
1479 Unicode characters of the range U+0100..U+24FF. Currently, this
1480 character set is not used.
1481
1482 ** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and
1483 `japanese-jisx0213-2' are introduced for the new Japanese standard JIS
1484 X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2.
1485
1486 +++
1487 ** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
1488 are introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and
1489 0xA0..0xFF respectively.
1490
1491 +++
1492 ** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
1493 that offset in the file before writing.
1494
1495 ** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and
1496 compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode).
1497
1498 ** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
1499 `*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
1500 from which the command was issued.
1501
1502 ** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
1503 `query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
1504 `replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
1505 additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
1506 operate on.
1507
1508 ** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
1509 to `window-buffer-height'.
1510
1511 - Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
1512
1513 Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
1514 The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
1515 lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
1516
1517 Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
1518 respectively.
1519
1520 If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optinal third argument
1521 COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
1522
1523 The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
1524 obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
1525 on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
1526
1527 Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
1528 buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
1529 possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
1530 is currently displayed in some window.
1531
1532 ** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
1533 argument function's results.
1534
1535 ** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
1536 signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails.
1537
1538 ** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
1539 header is the list of headers passed to it.
1540
1541 ** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
1542 ignores differences in case and text representation.
1543
1544 ** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
1545 cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
1546 as follows:
1547
1548 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
1549 nil don't display a cursor
1550 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
1551 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
1552 others display a box cursor.
1553
1554 ** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
1555 an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
1556 defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
1557 set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
1558
1559 ** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
1560 specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
1561 the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
1562 text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
1563
1564 Example:
1565
1566 (string-to-syntax "()")
1567 => (4 . 41)
1568
1569 ** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
1570 other than 10.
1571
1572 *** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
1573 INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
1574
1575 #b1111
1576 => 15
1577 #b-1111
1578 => -15
1579
1580 *** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
1581
1582 #o666
1583 => 438
1584
1585 *** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
1586
1587 #xbeef
1588 => 48815
1589
1590 *** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
1591
1592 #2R-111
1593 => -7
1594 #25rah
1595 => 267
1596
1597 ** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
1598 the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
1599 and isn't a string.
1600
1601 ** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
1602 a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
1603 value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
1604 not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
1605
1606 +++
1607 ** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
1608
1609 ** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
1610 for a regexp in a string.
1611
1612 ** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
1613 `mouse-position-function'.
1614
1615 ** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
1616 that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
1617
1618 ** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
1619 Keywords are now always considered constants.
1620
1621 +++
1622 ** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
1623 returns it.
1624
1625 ** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
1626 returned by function `recent-keys'.
1627
1628 +++
1629 ** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
1630 can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
1631 Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
1632 etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
1633 mode.
1634
1635 +++
1636 ** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
1637 and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
1638
1639 +++
1640 ** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
1641 has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
1642 function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
1643 returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
1644 been performed."
1645
1646 When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
1647 and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
1648 hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
1649 then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
1650
1651 +++
1652 ** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
1653 In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
1654 and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
1655
1656 +++
1657 ** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
1658 with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
1659 specified table.
1660
1661 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
1662
1663 Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
1664 TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
1665 saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
1666 what BODY returns.
1667
1668 +++
1669 ** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
1670 Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
1671
1672 +++
1673 ** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
1674 removed since it wasn't used by anything.
1675
1676 +++
1677 ** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
1678 instead of being optional.
1679
1680 +++
1681 ** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
1682 modify read-only text.
1683
1684 +++
1685 ** New functions and variables for locales.
1686
1687 The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
1688 decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
1689 time functions like strftime. The new variables
1690 `system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
1691 locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
1692
1693 The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
1694 environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
1695 the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
1696 environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
1697 not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
1698 `locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
1699 `locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
1700
1701 +++
1702 ** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
1703 To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
1704 modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
1705 start sequences.
1706
1707 +++
1708 ** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
1709 because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
1710
1711 +++
1712 ** New function `propertize'
1713
1714 The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
1715 strings with text properties.
1716
1717 - Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
1718
1719 Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
1720 by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
1721 PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
1722 specified value of that property. Example:
1723
1724 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
1725
1726 +++
1727 ** push and pop macros.
1728
1729 Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
1730 are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
1731 as the place that holds the list to be changed.
1732
1733 (push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
1734 (pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
1735 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
1736
1737 ** New dolist and dotimes macros.
1738
1739 Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
1740 are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
1741
1742 (dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
1743 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
1744 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
1745 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
1746
1747 (dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
1748 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
1749 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
1750 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
1751
1752 +++
1753 ** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such
1754 as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on.
1755
1756 [:digit:] matches 0 through 9
1757 [:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
1758 [:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
1759 [:blank:] matches space and tab only
1760 [:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
1761 space, and DEL.
1762 [:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
1763 and DEL.
1764 [:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
1765 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1766 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
1767 [:alpha:] matches letters.
1768 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1769 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
1770 [:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
1771 [:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
1772 [:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
1773 [:punct:] matches punctuation.
1774 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1775 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
1776 [:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
1777 [:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
1778 [:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
1779
1780 +++
1781 ** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
1782
1783 The following functions are defined for hash tables:
1784
1785 - Function: make-hash-table ARGS
1786
1787 The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
1788 are optional. The following arguments are defined:
1789
1790 :test TEST
1791
1792 TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
1793 Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
1794 it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
1795
1796 :size SIZE
1797
1798 SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
1799 many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
1800
1801 :rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
1802
1803 REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
1804 full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
1805 size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
1806 1.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
1807 old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
1808
1809 :rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
1810
1811 THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
1812 hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
1813 (size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
1814
1815 :weakness WEAK
1816
1817 WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value', or t.
1818 Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage collection if
1819 their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere outside of the
1820 hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
1821
1822 - Function: makehash &optional TEST
1823
1824 Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
1825
1826 - Function: hash-table-p TABLE
1827
1828 Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
1829
1830 - Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
1831
1832 Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
1833 values are shared.
1834
1835 - Function: hash-table-count TABLE
1836
1837 Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
1838
1839 - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
1840
1841 Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
1842
1843 - Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
1844
1845 Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
1846
1847 - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
1848
1849 Returns the size of TABLE.
1850
1851 - Function: hash-table-rehash-test TABLE
1852
1853 Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
1854
1855 - Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
1856
1857 Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
1858
1859 - Function: clrhash TABLE
1860
1861 Clear TABLE.
1862
1863 - Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
1864
1865 Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
1866 not found.
1867
1868 - Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
1869
1870 Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
1871 another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
1872
1873 - Function: remhash KEY TABLE
1874
1875 Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
1876
1877 - Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
1878
1879 Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
1880 arguments KEY and VALUE.
1881
1882 - Function: sxhash OBJ
1883
1884 Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
1885
1886 - Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
1887
1888 Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
1889 a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
1890 comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
1891 and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
1892 of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
1893
1894 TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
1895
1896 HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
1897 code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
1898 integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
1899
1900 Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
1901 be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
1902
1903 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
1904 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
1905
1906 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
1907 (sxhash (upcase a)))
1908
1909 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
1910 'case-fold-string-hash))
1911
1912 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
1913
1914 +++
1915 ** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
1916
1917 It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
1918 circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
1919 a cons cell which is its own cdr.
1920
1921 +++
1922 ** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
1923
1924 If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
1925 #N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
1926
1927 +++
1928 ** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
1929 t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
1930 specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
1931 is too short to reach that column.
1932
1933 +++
1934 ** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
1935 now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
1936 after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
1937 two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
1938
1939 If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
1940 perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
1941 and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
1942
1943 +++
1944 ** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
1945 to specify which buffer to return the size of.
1946
1947 +++
1948 ** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
1949 calendar-move-hook after moving point.
1950
1951 +++
1952 ** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
1953 directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
1954 small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
1955 small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
1956 temporary-file-directory instead.
1957
1958 +++
1959 ** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
1960 the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
1961 `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
1962 hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
1963
1964 +++
1965 ** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
1966 elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
1967
1968 +++
1969 ** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
1970
1971 make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
1972 creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
1973 ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
1974
1975 +++
1976 ** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
1977
1978 The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
1979 on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
1980 is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
1981 never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
1982 ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
1983 overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
1984
1985 If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
1986 that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
1987 to get an error if the file exists at that time.
1988 The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
1989
1990 +++
1991 ** Function `format' now handles text properties.
1992
1993 Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
1994 If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
1995 ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
1996 result string.
1997
1998 Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
1999 string where arguments appear in the result string.
2000
2001 Example:
2002
2003 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
2004 (s2 "world"))
2005 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
2006 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
2007 (format s1 s2))
2008
2009 results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
2010
2011 +++
2012 ** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
2013
2014 Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
2015 The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
2016 argument in it.
2017
2018 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
2019 (arg "world"))
2020 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
2021 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
2022 (message msg arg))
2023
2024 +++
2025 ** Sound support
2026
2027 Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
2028 (Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
2029
2030 Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
2031 (*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
2032 to enable sound support.
2033
2034 Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
2035 list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
2036 when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
2037 functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
2038 sound to play, before playing the sound.
2039
2040 The following sound properties are supported:
2041
2042 - `:file FILE'
2043
2044 FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
2045 searched relative to `data-directory'.
2046
2047 - `:data DATA'
2048
2049 DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
2050 may be present, but not both.
2051
2052 - `:volume VOLUME'
2053
2054 VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
2055 0..1. This property is optional.
2056
2057 Other properties are ignored.
2058
2059 ** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
2060
2061 ** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
2062 a keyword symbol.
2063
2064 ** Changes to garbage collection
2065
2066 *** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
2067 of live and free strings.
2068
2069 *** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
2070 strings that have been consed so far.
2071
2072 \f
2073 * Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs
2074 Lisp Manual
2075
2076 +++
2077 ** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text.
2078
2079 ** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an
2080 image.
2081
2082 - Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME
2083
2084 Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT).
2085
2086 SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes
2087 measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical
2088 character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default
2089 font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
2090 FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame.
2091
2092 ** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image
2093 satisfying one of a list of specifications.
2094
2095 +++
2096 ** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now
2097 optional.
2098
2099 ** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center'.
2100
2101 When this property is specified, the image is vertically centered
2102 around a centerline which would be the vertical center of text drawn
2103 at the position of the image, in the manner specified by the text
2104 properties and overlays that apply to the image.
2105
2106 \f
2107 * New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
2108
2109 Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
2110 --- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
2111 When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
2112 so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
2113
2114 ** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
2115 to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
2116
2117 Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
2118 text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
2119 is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
2120 your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
2121 laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
2122 just display it black instead.
2123
2124 This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
2125 a line like
2126
2127 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
2128
2129 in your `.emacs'.
2130
2131 ** New face implementation.
2132
2133 Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
2134 font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
2135
2136 +++
2137 *** New faces.
2138
2139 Each face can specify the following display attributes:
2140
2141 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
2142
2143 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
2144 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
2145
2146 3. Font height in 1/10pt
2147
2148 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
2149
2150 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
2151
2152 6. Foreground color.
2153
2154 7. Background color.
2155
2156 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
2157
2158 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
2159
2160 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
2161
2162 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
2163
2164 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
2165 color.
2166
2167 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
2168 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
2169
2170 Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
2171 same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
2172 frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
2173 faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
2174 with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
2175 attributes mentioned above.
2176
2177 There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
2178 definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
2179 created frames.
2180
2181 A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
2182 have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
2183 `fully-specified'.
2184
2185 +++
2186 *** Face merging.
2187
2188 The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
2189 combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
2190 aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
2191 properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
2192 that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
2193 results in a fully-specified face.
2194
2195 +++
2196 *** Face realization.
2197
2198 After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
2199 merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
2200 realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
2201 available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
2202 face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
2203 cache of the frame on which it was realized.
2204
2205 Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
2206 character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
2207 for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
2208 charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
2209
2210 Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
2211 specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
2212 being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
2213 the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
2214 statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
2215
2216 In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
2217 `char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
2218 0x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
2219 the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
2220 initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
2221 Emacs.
2222
2223 Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
2224 `enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
2225 registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
2226 with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
2227
2228 ++++
2229 **** Clearing face caches.
2230
2231 The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
2232 on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
2233 unused fonts.
2234
2235 +++
2236 *** Font selection.
2237
2238 Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
2239 given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
2240 for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
2241
2242 If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
2243 pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
2244 family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
2245 property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
2246 an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
2247
2248 Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
2249 against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
2250 match for the given face attributes in this font list.
2251
2252 Font selection can be influenced by the user.
2253
2254 The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
2255 attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
2256 face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
2257 names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
2258 that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
2259 width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
2260 to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
2261
2262 Setting `face-alternative-font-family-alist' allows the user to
2263 specify alternative font families to try if a family specified by a
2264 face doesn't exist.
2265
2266 +++
2267 **** Scalable fonts
2268
2269 Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
2270 since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
2271 servers.
2272
2273 To enable scalable font use, set the variable
2274 `scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
2275 scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
2276 Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
2277 scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
2278 that list. Example:
2279
2280 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
2281
2282 allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
2283
2284 +++
2285 *** Functions and variables related to font selection.
2286
2287 - Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
2288
2289 Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
2290 is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
2291 string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
2292
2293 If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
2294 the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
2295 FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
2296 POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
2297 SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
2298 These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
2299 if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
2300 REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
2301 the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
2302 of the face font sort order.
2303
2304 - Function: x-font-family-list
2305
2306 Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
2307 omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
2308 (FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
2309 non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
2310
2311 - Variable: font-list-limit
2312
2313 Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
2314 won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
2315 matching font. The default is currently 100.
2316
2317 +++
2318 *** Setting face attributes.
2319
2320 For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
2321 with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
2322 implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
2323 `face-attribute'.
2324
2325 Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
2326 symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
2327
2328 The following attributes are recognized:
2329
2330 `:family'
2331
2332 VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
2333 or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
2334 and `?' are allowed.
2335
2336 `:width'
2337
2338 VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
2339 It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
2340 `condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
2341 `extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
2342
2343 `:height'
2344
2345 VALUE must be an integer specifying the height of the font to use in
2346 1/10 pt.
2347
2348 `:weight'
2349
2350 VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
2351 symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
2352 `semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
2353
2354 `:slant'
2355
2356 VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
2357 symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
2358 `reverse-oblique'.
2359
2360 `:foreground', `:background'
2361
2362 VALUE must be a color name, a string.
2363
2364 `:underline'
2365
2366 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
2367 VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
2368 a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
2369 don't underline.
2370
2371 `:overline'
2372
2373 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
2374 VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
2375 string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
2376 overline.
2377
2378 `:strike-through'
2379
2380 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
2381 striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
2382 face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
2383 is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
2384
2385 `:box'
2386
2387 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
2388 around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
2389 VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
2390 of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
2391 and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
2392 VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
2393 :color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
2394 the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
2395 specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
2396 defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
2397 the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
2398 color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
2399 should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
2400 like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
2401 that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
2402 the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
2403 box.
2404
2405 `:inverse-video'
2406
2407 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
2408 inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
2409
2410 `:stipple'
2411
2412 If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
2413 The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
2414 searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
2415 HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
2416 is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
2417 explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
2418
2419 For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
2420 and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
2421
2422 `:font'
2423
2424 Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
2425 XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
2426 is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
2427 versions of Emacs.
2428
2429 For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
2430 be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
2431 must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
2432
2433 Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
2434 `defface'.
2435
2436 *** Face attributes and X resources
2437
2438 The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
2439 from X resources:
2440
2441 Face attribute X resource class
2442 -----------------------------------------------------------------------
2443 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
2444 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
2445 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
2446 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
2447 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
2448 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
2449 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
2450 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
2451 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
2452 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
2453 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
2454 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
2455 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
2456 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
2457 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
2458 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2459 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
2460 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
2461 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2462
2463 +++
2464 *** Text property `face'.
2465
2466 The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
2467 specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
2468 specification can be
2469
2470 1. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
2471
2472 2. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
2473 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
2474 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
2475 for face attribute names.
2476
2477 3. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
2478 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
2479 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
2480
2481 +++
2482 ** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
2483
2484 The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
2485 on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
2486 the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
2487 default. You can get defined colors with a call to
2488 `defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
2489 used to clear the mapping table.
2490
2491 ** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
2492
2493 The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
2494 and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
2495 type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
2496 color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
2497 display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
2498 old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
2499 `x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
2500 compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
2501 should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
2502 modify their color-related behavior.
2503
2504 The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
2505 any frame type.
2506
2507 ** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
2508
2509 The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
2510 `display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
2511 `display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
2512 `display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
2513 `display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
2514 `display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
2515 display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
2516 the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
2517 platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
2518
2519 +++
2520 ** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
2521
2522 This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
2523
2524 The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
2525 end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
2526 Otherwise, it returns zero.
2527
2528 ** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
2529
2530 There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
2531 buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
2532 text-property.
2533
2534 Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
2535 forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
2536 to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
2537 not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
2538 commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
2539 boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
2540 `inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
2541 functions.
2542
2543 Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
2544 a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
2545 editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
2546
2547 The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
2548
2549 - Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE
2550
2551 Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
2552 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2553 If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
2554 constrained position if that is is different.
2555
2556 If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
2557 positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
2558 ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
2559 constrained to the field that has the same `field' text-property
2560 as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2561 is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
2562 fields.
2563
2564 If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
2565 NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
2566 unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
2567 C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
2568 only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
2569
2570 - Function: erase-field &optional POS
2571
2572 Erases the field surrounding POS.
2573 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2574 If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2575
2576 - Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2577
2578 Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
2579 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2580 If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2581 If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is already at beginning of an
2582 field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
2583
2584 - Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2585
2586 Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
2587 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2588 If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2589 If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is already at end of a field,
2590 then the end of the *following* field is returned.
2591
2592 - Function: field-string &optional POS
2593
2594 Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
2595 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2596 If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2597
2598 - Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
2599
2600 Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
2601 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2602 If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2603
2604 +++
2605 ** Image support.
2606
2607 Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
2608 strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
2609 (AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
2610 replaces the display of the characters having that property.
2611
2612 If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
2613 `(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
2614 AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
2615 window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
2616 area.
2617
2618 IMAGE is an image specification.
2619
2620 *** Image specifications
2621
2622 Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
2623 is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
2624 specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
2625 symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
2626 described below are ignored.
2627
2628 The following is a list of properties all image types share.
2629
2630 `:ascent ASCENT'
2631
2632 ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
2633 If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
2634 to use for its ascent.
2635
2636 If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
2637 image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
2638
2639 If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a
2640 centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position
2641 of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and
2642 overlays that apply to the image.
2643
2644 `:margin MARGIN'
2645
2646 MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as
2647 margin around the image. Default is 0.
2648
2649 `:relief RELIEF'
2650
2651 RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
2652 around an image.
2653
2654 `:algorithm ALGO'
2655
2656 Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it. ALGO must
2657 be a symbol specifying the algorithm. Currently only `laplace' is
2658 supported which applies a Laplace edge detection algorithm to an image
2659 which is intended to display images "disabled."
2660
2661 `:heuristic-mask BG'
2662
2663 If BG is not nil, build a clipping mask for the image, so that the
2664 background of a frame is visible behind the image. If BG is t,
2665 determine the background color of the image by looking at the 4
2666 corners of the image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from
2667 the corners is the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must
2668 be a list `(RED GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the
2669 background of the image.
2670
2671 `:file FILE'
2672
2673 Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
2674 search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
2675 building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
2676 may be present in the image specification.
2677
2678 `:data DATA'
2679
2680 Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
2681 supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
2682 present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
2683 support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
2684
2685 *** Supported image types
2686
2687 **** XBM, image type `xbm'.
2688
2689 XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
2690 properties supported are
2691
2692 `:foreground FG'
2693
2694 FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
2695 is the frame's foreground.
2696
2697 `:background FG'
2698
2699 BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
2700 the frame's background color.
2701
2702 XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
2703 case, the image specification must contain the following properties
2704 instead of a `:file' property.
2705
2706 `:width WIDTH'
2707
2708 WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
2709
2710 `:height HEIGHT'
2711
2712 HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
2713
2714 `:data DATA'
2715
2716 DATA must be either
2717
2718 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
2719 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
2720
2721 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
2722
2723 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
2724 bitmap.
2725
2726 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
2727 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
2728 in the file.
2729
2730 **** XPM, image type `xpm'
2731
2732 XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
2733 `xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
2734 found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
2735 `--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
2736
2737 Additional image properties supported are:
2738
2739 `:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
2740
2741 SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
2742 name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
2743 name.
2744
2745 XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
2746 add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
2747
2748 The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
2749 to display compressed images.
2750
2751 **** PBM, image type `pbm'
2752
2753 PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
2754 mono images are supported. There are no additional image properties
2755 defined.
2756
2757 **** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
2758
2759 Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
2760 package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
2761 are:
2762
2763 **** TIFF, image type `tiff'
2764
2765 Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
2766 package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
2767 properties defined.
2768
2769 **** GIF, image type `gif'
2770
2771 Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
2772 `libungif-4.1.0', or later.
2773
2774 Additional image properties supported are:
2775
2776 `:index INDEX'
2777
2778 INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
2779 multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
2780
2781 This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
2782 For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
2783 at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
2784 every 0.1 seconds.
2785
2786 (defun show-anim (file max)
2787 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
2788 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
2789
2790 (defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
2791 (when (= idx max)
2792 (setq idx 0))
2793 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
2794 (save-excursion
2795 (set-buffer buffer)
2796 (goto-char (point-min))
2797 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
2798 (insert-image img "x"))
2799 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
2800
2801 **** PNG, image type `png'
2802
2803 Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
2804 package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
2805 properties defined.
2806
2807 **** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
2808
2809 Additional image properties supported are:
2810
2811 `:pt-width WIDTH'
2812
2813 WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
2814 integer. This is a required property.
2815
2816 `:pt-height HEIGHT'
2817
2818 HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
2819 must be a integer. This is an required property.
2820
2821 `:bounding-box BOX'
2822
2823 BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
2824 the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
2825 files. This is an required property.
2826
2827 Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
2828 lisp/gs.el.
2829
2830 *** Lisp interface.
2831
2832 The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
2833 which are supported in the current configuration.
2834
2835 Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
2836 they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
2837 The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
2838 manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
2839 images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
2840
2841 *** Simplified image API, image.el
2842
2843 The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
2844 creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
2845 can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
2846 define an image based on available image types. The functions
2847 `put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
2848 buffer.
2849
2850 +++
2851 ** Display margins.
2852
2853 Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
2854 and images.
2855
2856 To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
2857 `left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
2858 `set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
2859 obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
2860 `right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
2861 the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
2862 of the display margins.
2863
2864 You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
2865 containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
2866 one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
2867 string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
2868 in this file).
2869
2870 +++
2871 ** Help display
2872
2873 Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
2874 moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
2875 `help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
2876 that have a `help-echo' property.
2877
2878 If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function
2879 is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is
2880 the window in which the help was found.
2881
2882 If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the
2883 `help-echo' text property was found.
2884
2885 If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and
2886 POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse.
2887
2888 If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with
2889 the `display' property). POS is the position in that string under the
2890 mouse.
2891
2892 If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a
2893 string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string.
2894
2895 For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to
2896 determine the help to display. If their definition contains a
2897 property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string.
2898 For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is
2899 used as help string.
2900
2901 The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
2902 the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window
2903 causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
2904
2905 +++
2906 ** Vertical fractional scrolling.
2907
2908 The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
2909 This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
2910
2911 The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
2912 scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
2913 The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
2914 scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
2915 used.
2916
2917 (global-set-key [A-down]
2918 #'(lambda ()
2919 (interactive)
2920 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
2921 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
2922 (global-set-key [A-up]
2923 #'(lambda ()
2924 (interactive)
2925 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
2926 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
2927
2928 +++
2929 ** New hook `fontification-functions'.
2930
2931 Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
2932 when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
2933 variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
2934 is called with one argument, POS.
2935
2936 At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
2937 characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
2938 as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
2939 property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
2940 `fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
2941
2942 +++
2943 ** Tool bar support.
2944
2945 Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
2946 parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
2947 controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
2948 suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
2949 `auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
2950 automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
2951
2952 *** Tool bar item definitions
2953
2954 Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
2955 `tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
2956 where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
2957
2958 CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
2959 evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
2960 the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
2961 property (see below).
2962
2963 BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
2964 binding are currently ignored.
2965
2966 The following properties are recognized:
2967
2968 `:enable FORM'.
2969
2970 FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
2971 or disabled.
2972
2973 `:visible FORM'
2974
2975 FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
2976
2977 `:filter FUNCTION'
2978
2979 FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
2980 FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
2981 used instead of BINDING to display this item.
2982
2983 `:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
2984
2985 TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
2986 and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
2987
2988 `:image IMAGES'
2989
2990 IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
2991 image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
2992 meaning of each of the four elements:
2993
2994 Index Use when item is
2995 ----------------------------------------
2996 0 enabled and selected
2997 1 enabled and deselected
2998 2 disabled and selected
2999 3 disabled and deselected
3000
3001 If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection
3002 algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state.
3003
3004 `:help HELP-STRING'.
3005
3006 Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
3007 is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
3008
3009 *** Tool-bar-related variables.
3010
3011 If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
3012 resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
3013 than 1/4 of the frame's size.
3014
3015 If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
3016 raised when the mouse moves over them.
3017
3018 You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
3019 `tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
3020 pixels. Default is 1.
3021
3022 You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
3023 `tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
3024
3025 *** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
3026
3027 You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
3028 a tool bar item. If
3029
3030 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
3031 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
3032 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
3033
3034 is the original tool bar item definition, then
3035
3036 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
3037
3038 makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
3039 item.
3040
3041 ** Mode line changes.
3042
3043 +++
3044 *** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
3045
3046 The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
3047 that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
3048 a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
3049
3050 1. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
3051 a `local-map' text property.
3052
3053 2. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
3054 that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
3055
3056 3. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
3057 is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
3058 `local-map' property.
3059
3060 The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
3061 properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
3062 example.
3063
3064 *** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
3065 evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
3066
3067 +++
3068 *** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
3069 variable mode-line-format to nil.
3070
3071 +++
3072 *** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
3073
3074 This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
3075 `header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
3076 completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
3077 `default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
3078 line.
3079
3080 The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
3081 `header-line'.
3082
3083 The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
3084 position in the header-line.
3085
3086 +++
3087 ** Text property `display'
3088
3089 The `display' text property is used to insert images into text, and
3090 also control other aspects of how text displays. The value of the
3091 `display' property should be a display specification, as described
3092 below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
3093
3094 *** Variable width and height spaces
3095
3096 To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
3097 specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
3098 `(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
3099 area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
3100 marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
3101 displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
3102 simpler form STRETCH as property value.
3103
3104 The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
3105 PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
3106 properties described below.
3107
3108 The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
3109 characters having the `display' property.
3110
3111 - :width WIDTH
3112
3113 Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
3114 character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
3115
3116 - :relative-width FACTOR
3117
3118 Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
3119 first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
3120 same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
3121 width of that character by FACTOR.
3122
3123 - :align-to HPOS
3124
3125 Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
3126 value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
3127
3128 Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
3129
3130 - :height HEIGHT
3131
3132 Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
3133 normal line height.
3134
3135 - :relative-height FACTOR
3136
3137 The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
3138 of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
3139
3140 - :ascent ASCENT
3141
3142 Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
3143 used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
3144 baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
3145 equal to 100.
3146
3147 You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
3148
3149 *** Images
3150
3151 A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
3152 . IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
3153 in the display, the characters having this display specification in
3154 their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
3155 the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
3156 `(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
3157 area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
3158 the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
3159 as display specification.
3160
3161 *** Other display properties
3162
3163 - :space-width FACTOR
3164
3165 Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
3166 should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
3167 integer or float.
3168
3169 - :height HEIGHT
3170
3171 Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
3172
3173 If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
3174 means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
3175 the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
3176 ``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
3177 a font is available counts as a step.
3178
3179 If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
3180 as tall as the frame's default font.
3181
3182 If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
3183 height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
3184
3185 Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
3186 `height' bound to the current specified font height.
3187
3188 - :raise FACTOR
3189
3190 FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
3191 font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
3192 raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
3193 amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
3194 `:height' subproperty.
3195
3196 *** Conditional display properties
3197
3198 All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
3199 has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
3200 applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
3201 During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
3202 the text having the `display' property.
3203
3204 The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
3205 `(:when t SPEC)'.
3206
3207 +++
3208 ** New menu separator types.
3209
3210 Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
3211 item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
3212 treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
3213 to specify other menu separator types.
3214
3215 - `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
3216
3217 No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
3218 separator occurs.
3219
3220 - `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
3221
3222 A single line in the menu's foreground color.
3223
3224 - `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
3225
3226 A double line in the menu's foreground color.
3227
3228 - `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
3229
3230 A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
3231
3232 - `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
3233
3234 A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
3235
3236 - `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
3237
3238 A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
3239 displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
3240
3241 - `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
3242
3243 A single line with 3D raised appearance.
3244
3245 - `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
3246
3247 A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
3248
3249 - `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
3250
3251 A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
3252
3253 - `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
3254
3255 Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
3256
3257 - `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
3258
3259 Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
3260
3261 - `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
3262
3263 Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
3264
3265 - `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
3266
3267 Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
3268
3269 Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
3270 the corresponding single-line separators.
3271
3272 +++
3273 ** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
3274
3275 The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
3276 `scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
3277 Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
3278 that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
3279 default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
3280 default background is the background color of the frame, and the
3281 default foreground is black.
3282
3283 The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
3284 (class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
3285 `ScrollBarBackground').
3286
3287 Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
3288 settings for scroll bar colors.
3289
3290 +++
3291 ** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
3292 display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
3293
3294 ---
3295 ** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
3296 starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
3297 on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
3298 line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
3299 the original window start.
3300
3301 ---
3302 ** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
3303 `hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
3304 now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
3305
3306 +++
3307 ** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
3308
3309 A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
3310 `window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
3311 windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
3312 other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
3313
3314 The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
3315 fixed-width and fixed-height.
3316
3317 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
3318
3319 A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
3320 fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
3321 window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
3322 change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
3323 temporarily to nil, for example
3324
3325 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
3326 (enlarge-window 10))
3327
3328 Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
3329 or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
3330
3331 ** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
3332 terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
3333 to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
3334 overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
3335 horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
3336 support a vertical-bar cursor).
3337 ^L
3338 * Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes
3339
3340 ** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard
3341 input.
3342
3343 ** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos.
3344
3345 ** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages.
3346
3347 ** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not
3348 only for character input, but also in incremental search. The
3349 exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets
3350 (e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence
3351 (e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search.
3352
3353 ** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has
3354 been added.
3355
3356 ^L
3357 * Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change
3358
3359 ** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added.
3360
3361 ^L
3362 * Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
3363
3364 ** Not new, but not mentioned before:
3365 M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
3366 \f
3367 * Changes in Emacs 20.4
3368
3369 ** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
3370
3371 You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
3372 Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
3373 `.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
3374
3375 If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
3376 is the one that is used.
3377
3378 ** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
3379 the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
3380 Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
3381 separate from the command's regular output.
3382 Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
3383 says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
3384 In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
3385 the buffer name.
3386
3387 When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
3388 output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
3389 it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
3390 cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
3391
3392 ** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
3393 the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
3394 is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
3395 created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
3396
3397 ** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
3398 example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
3399 match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
3400 quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
3401
3402 ** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
3403 now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
3404 if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
3405 they never ignore case.
3406
3407 ** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
3408 under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
3409 applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
3410 of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
3411 just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
3412 convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
3413 part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
3414
3415 If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
3416 the same format that was used in the file before.
3417
3418 You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
3419 `inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
3420
3421 ** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
3422 renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
3423 This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
3424
3425 ** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
3426 The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
3427 buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
3428 your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
3429 is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
3430 end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
3431 Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
3432
3433 The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
3434 eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
3435 control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
3436 format. You can now customize these variables.
3437
3438 ** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
3439 filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
3440 filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
3441 enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
3442
3443 ** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
3444 in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
3445 windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
3446
3447 ** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
3448 dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
3449 doesn't have any effect.
3450
3451 ** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
3452 not one per buffer.
3453
3454 ** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
3455 use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
3456 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
3457
3458 ** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
3459 To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
3460 `auto-show-mode' command.
3461
3462 ** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
3463 avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
3464 versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
3465 choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
3466 occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
3467
3468 ** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
3469 cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
3470
3471 ** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
3472 character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
3473 feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
3474
3475 ** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
3476 the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
3477 interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
3478 and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
3479
3480 ** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
3481
3482 The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
3483 that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
3484 one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
3485 codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
3486 set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
3487
3488 Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
3489 from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
3490
3491 IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
3492 equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
3493 a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
3494 `?' on other systems.
3495
3496 IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
3497 feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
3498 Unix.
3499
3500 Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
3501 current codepage when it starts.
3502
3503 ** Mail changes
3504
3505 *** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
3506 `mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
3507 appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
3508 non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
3509 MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
3510 headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
3511 latin-1:
3512
3513 MIME-version: 1.0
3514 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
3515 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
3516
3517 *** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
3518 default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
3519 default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
3520 sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
3521 buffer-file-coding-system.
3522
3523 You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
3524 sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
3525 mail.
3526
3527 *** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
3528 if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
3529 Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
3530 list of possible coding systems.
3531
3532 ** CC Mode changes
3533
3534 *** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
3535 modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
3536 longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
3537 docstring for details.
3538
3539 *** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
3540 symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
3541 found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
3542 prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
3543 lineup functions use this feature currently.
3544
3545 *** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
3546 "finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
3547
3548 *** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
3549 "catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
3550
3551 *** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
3552 from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
3553 symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
3554 c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
3555 anonymous classes.
3556
3557 *** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
3558 syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
3559
3560 *** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
3561 inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
3562 support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
3563 function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
3564
3565 *** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
3566 (i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
3567 brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
3568 c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
3569 (brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
3570
3571 *** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
3572
3573 *** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
3574
3575 *** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
3576 for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
3577
3578 *** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
3579
3580 *** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
3581 associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
3582 This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
3583 circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
3584 class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
3585
3586 ** Gnus changes.
3587
3588 *** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
3589 added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
3590 Gnus manual for the full story.
3591
3592 *** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
3593 before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
3594 group, which is created automatically.
3595
3596 *** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
3597 values.
3598
3599 *** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
3600
3601 *** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
3602 outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
3603
3604 *** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
3605 `C-u C-c C-c'.
3606
3607 *** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
3608
3609 *** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
3610 re-highlighting of the article buffer.
3611
3612 *** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
3613
3614 *** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
3615 Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
3616
3617 *** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
3618 `a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
3619
3620 *** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
3621 control over simplification.
3622
3623 *** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
3624
3625 *** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
3626 limit.
3627
3628 *** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
3629
3630 *** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
3631
3632 *** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
3633 If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
3634 rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
3635
3636 *** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
3637 `a' forces normal posting method.
3638
3639 *** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
3640 -- `W d'.
3641
3642 *** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
3643 to a non-nil value.
3644
3645 *** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
3646 where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
3647
3648 *** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
3649 has been added.
3650
3651 *** A history of where mails have been split is available.
3652
3653 *** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
3654
3655 *** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
3656 `gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
3657
3658 *** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
3659 `message-cite-original-without-signature'.
3660
3661 *** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
3662
3663 *** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
3664 been added.
3665
3666 *** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
3667 `gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
3668
3669 *** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
3670 updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
3671
3672 *** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
3673
3674 *** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
3675
3676 *** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
3677
3678 ** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
3679
3680 *** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
3681 options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
3682 nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
3683
3684 *** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
3685 TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
3686 of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
3687 TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
3688 can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
3689
3690 *** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
3691 All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
3692 but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
3693 the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
3694
3695 *** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
3696 the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
3697 buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
3698 mismatch.
3699
3700 ** Changes to RefTeX mode
3701
3702 *** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
3703 file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
3704
3705 *** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
3706 lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
3707 characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
3708 removed from the label.
3709
3710 *** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
3711 a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
3712
3713 *** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
3714 customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
3715
3716 *** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
3717 `reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
3718 expressions.
3719
3720 *** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
3721
3722 ** New/deleted modes and packages
3723
3724 *** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
3725 SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
3726
3727 *** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
3728 editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
3729 SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
3730
3731 *** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
3732 changes with a special face.
3733
3734 *** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
3735 this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
3736 Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
3737 \f
3738 * MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
3739
3740 ** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
3741 This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
3742 conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
3743 and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
3744 check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
3745
3746 The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
3747 Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
3748 distribution when the config.bat script is run.
3749
3750 ** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
3751 MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
3752 controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
3753 directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
3754 Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
3755 on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
3756 string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
3757 program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
3758 printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
3759
3760 ** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
3761 output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
3762 available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
3763 input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
3764 temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
3765 program.
3766
3767 An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
3768 and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
3769 programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
3770 automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
3771 as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
3772 ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
3773
3774 ** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
3775 a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
3776 MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
3777 was not documented clearly before.
3778
3779 ** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
3780 This includes Tetris and Snake.
3781 \f
3782 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
3783
3784 ** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
3785 return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
3786 They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
3787 meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
3788
3789 ** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
3790 WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
3791 and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
3792
3793 ** Changes in the file-attributes function.
3794
3795 *** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
3796 It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
3797
3798 *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
3799 the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
3800 integers.
3801
3802 ** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
3803 files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
3804 arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
3805 file names and attributes are returned.
3806
3807 ** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
3808 sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
3809 accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
3810 It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
3811 returns the result.
3812
3813 ** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
3814 to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
3815
3816 ** New functions for base64 conversion:
3817
3818 The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
3819 into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
3820 performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
3821 optionally.
3822
3823 Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
3824 job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
3825
3826 **
3827 The new function process-running-child-p
3828 will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
3829 terminal to its own child process.
3830
3831 ** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
3832 when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
3833 to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
3834 itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
3835
3836 ** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
3837 be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
3838
3839 ** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
3840 :included is an alias for :visible.
3841
3842 easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
3843 easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
3844 to move or copy menu entries.
3845
3846 ** Multibyte editing changes
3847
3848 *** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
3849 an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
3850 make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
3851 work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
3852 char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
3853 (setq char (sref str idx)
3854 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
3855 The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
3856
3857 If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
3858 (say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
3859 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
3860
3861 *** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
3862 region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
3863 deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
3864
3865 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
3866
3867 This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
3868 across the boundary.
3869
3870 *** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
3871 `unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
3872 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
3873 contains 8-bit characters.
3874 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
3875 contains invalid characters.
3876
3877 *** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
3878 text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
3879 preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
3880 text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
3881 way.
3882
3883 *** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
3884 If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
3885 end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
3886 prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
3887
3888 *** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
3889 compose Thai characters in a string.
3890
3891 ** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
3892 argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
3893 for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
3894 menus should always use the third argument.
3895
3896 ** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
3897 read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
3898 arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
3899 input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
3900
3901 ** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
3902 of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
3903 programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
3904 inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
3905
3906 ** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
3907 the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
3908 returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
3909 echo area contents.
3910
3911 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
3912
3913 ** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
3914 NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
3915 requested feature cannot be loaded.
3916
3917 ** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
3918 foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
3919 means to clear out that attribute.
3920
3921 ** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
3922 gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
3923
3924 ** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
3925 read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
3926 unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
3927 end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
3928
3929 ** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
3930 the gap of the current buffer.
3931
3932 ** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
3933 to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
3934 current buffer.
3935
3936 ** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
3937 facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
3938 These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
3939 it back in after any modifications have been made.
3940 \f
3941 * Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
3942
3943 ** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
3944 the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
3945 /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
3946 directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
3947 subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
3948
3949 Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
3950 names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
3951 Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
3952 which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
3953 these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
3954
3955 Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
3956 starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
3957 time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
3958
3959 This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
3960 Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
3961 to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
3962 subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
3963 `.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
3964 results.
3965
3966 ** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
3967 GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
3968 that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
3969 fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
3970 \f
3971 * Changes in Emacs 20.3
3972
3973 ** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
3974 including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
3975 it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
3976 perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
3977
3978 ** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
3979 specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
3980 region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
3981 further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
3982 command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
3983 within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
3984 are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
3985 region.
3986
3987 In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
3988 selective undo.
3989
3990 ** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
3991 unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
3992 buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
3993 effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
3994 Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
3995
3996 The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
3997 though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
3998 -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
3999 load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
4000
4001 ** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
4002 no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
4003 enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
4004 something that most users not do.
4005
4006 ** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
4007 operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
4008 The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
4009 applications.
4010
4011 C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
4012 pasting operations.
4013
4014 ** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
4015 setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
4016 like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
4017 printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
4018 `ps-printer-name'.
4019
4020 ** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
4021 minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
4022 any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
4023 except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
4024 incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
4025 hits a new word.
4026
4027 Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
4028 Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
4029 to be confused by TeX commands.
4030
4031 You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
4032 correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
4033 clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
4034 of various alternative replacements and actions.
4035
4036 Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
4037 the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
4038 corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
4039 alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
4040 flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
4041
4042 Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
4043 flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
4044
4045 ** Changes in input method usage.
4046
4047 Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
4048 the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
4049 respectively.
4050
4051 You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
4052
4053 If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
4054 of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
4055
4056 The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
4057 that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
4058
4059 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
4060
4061 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
4062
4063 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
4064 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
4065
4066 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
4067 given in the following case:
4068 o When you are using a complex input method.
4069 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
4070
4071 If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
4072 input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
4073 and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
4074 setting it to t is helpful.
4075
4076 The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
4077
4078 In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
4079 keys:
4080 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
4081 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
4082 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
4083 These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
4084 environment.
4085
4086 ** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
4087 names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
4088 minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
4089 get
4090
4091 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
4092
4093 which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
4094
4095 Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
4096 Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
4097
4098 ** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
4099 at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
4100 its owner and group.
4101
4102 ** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
4103 Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
4104
4105 ** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
4106 contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
4107
4108 ** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
4109 which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
4110 in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
4111 by the left edge of the rectangle.
4112
4113 ** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
4114 increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
4115 C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
4116 for writing keyboard macros.
4117
4118 ** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
4119 files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
4120 frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
4121 the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
4122 additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
4123 info.
4124
4125 ** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
4126
4127 ** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
4128 query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
4129 contents only.
4130
4131 ** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
4132 confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
4133 the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
4134 says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
4135
4136 ** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
4137 non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
4138 literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
4139
4140 ** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
4141 now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
4142 Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
4143 inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
4144
4145 ** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
4146 failure if the command produces no output.
4147
4148 ** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
4149 manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
4150 the mouse.
4151
4152 ** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
4153 mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
4154 function and variable names.
4155
4156 ** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
4157 reading specific files. This has higher priority than
4158 file-coding-system-alist.
4159
4160 ** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
4161 t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
4162 converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
4163 the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
4164 according to the current fontset.
4165
4166 ** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
4167
4168 The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
4169 that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
4170 nonascii-insert-offset.
4171
4172 For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
4173 enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
4174 nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
4175 characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
4176
4177 ** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
4178 an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
4179
4180 ** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
4181 letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
4182
4183 ** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
4184 are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
4185 command keys.
4186
4187 ** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
4188 user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
4189
4190 Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
4191 user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
4192 all variables that have documentation.
4193
4194 ** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
4195 shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
4196 that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
4197 minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
4198 it should show; the default is 20.
4199
4200 Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
4201 the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
4202 of your input.
4203
4204 ** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
4205 all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
4206 recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
4207 argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
4208 the customizable options which were changed since that version.
4209 Newly added options are included as well.
4210
4211 If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
4212 then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
4213 for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
4214
4215 This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
4216 Customize menu.
4217
4218 ** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
4219 the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
4220
4221 ** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
4222 buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
4223 invoked.
4224
4225 ** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
4226 that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
4227 The default is 1.
4228
4229 ** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
4230 syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
4231 new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
4232 (C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
4233 sensibly.
4234
4235 ** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
4236
4237 ** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
4238 value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
4239 two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
4240
4241 ** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
4242 reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
4243 for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
4244 every night.
4245
4246 ** Desktop changes
4247
4248 *** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
4249 the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
4250
4251 *** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
4252 and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
4253
4254 ** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
4255 read and post multi-lingual articles.
4256
4257 ** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
4258 doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
4259 be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
4260 outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
4261 the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
4262 made invisible again.
4263
4264 ** Mail reading and sending changes
4265
4266 *** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
4267 the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
4268 changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
4269 toggle.
4270
4271 *** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
4272 now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
4273 summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
4274 the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
4275 rmail-default-body-file.
4276
4277 *** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
4278 longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
4279 handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
4280
4281 *** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
4282 it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
4283 is evaluated to insert the signature.
4284
4285 *** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
4286 outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
4287 handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
4288 putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
4289 transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
4290 especially interested in trying feedmail.
4291
4292 feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
4293 feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
4294 provided by feedmail are:
4295
4296 **** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
4297 stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
4298 there is also a queue for draft messages
4299
4300 **** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
4301 be prompted for confirmation
4302
4303 **** does smart filling of address headers
4304
4305 **** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
4306 the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
4307 can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
4308
4309 **** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
4310 the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
4311 /usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
4312 function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
4313
4314 ** Dired changes
4315
4316 *** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
4317 files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
4318
4319 *** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
4320 run Dired on the directory name at point.
4321
4322 *** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
4323 files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
4324 for a specified regexp.
4325
4326 ** VC Changes
4327
4328 *** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
4329 conveniently.
4330
4331 *** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
4332 faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
4333 Dired.
4334
4335 VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
4336 directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
4337 listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
4338 currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
4339
4340 You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
4341 then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
4342 vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
4343 control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
4344 on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
4345
4346 All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
4347 is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
4348 `v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
4349 the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
4350 `vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
4351
4352 The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
4353 toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
4354 VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
4355 `* l', to mark all files currently locked.
4356
4357 Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
4358 ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
4359 command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
4360
4361 *** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
4362 file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
4363 session to resolve them.
4364
4365 Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
4366 resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
4367 contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
4368 uses as well).
4369
4370 *** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
4371 command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
4372 you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
4373 either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
4374 branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
4375 If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
4376 using ediff.
4377
4378 ** Changes in Font Lock
4379
4380 *** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
4381 are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
4382 use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
4383 unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
4384 compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
4385
4386 ** Frame name display changes
4387
4388 *** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
4389 frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
4390 raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
4391 when many frames are invisible or iconified.
4392
4393 *** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
4394 frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
4395 menu.
4396
4397 ** Comint (subshell) changes
4398
4399 *** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
4400 subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
4401 with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
4402
4403 *** There are new commands in Comint mode.
4404
4405 C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
4406 that is, the line after the last line you got.
4407 You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
4408
4409 C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
4410 send the current line together with the following line, when you send
4411 the following line.
4412
4413 C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
4414 which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
4415 previously sent input.
4416
4417 C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
4418 it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
4419 as the search string.
4420
4421 *** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
4422 automatically in compilation-mode windows.
4423
4424 ** C mode changes
4425
4426 *** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
4427 and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
4428 assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
4429 definition.
4430
4431 *** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
4432 (i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
4433 Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
4434 style is still the default however.
4435
4436 *** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
4437
4438 *** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
4439 are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
4440 them. They do not have key bindings by default.
4441
4442 *** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
4443 and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
4444
4445 *** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
4446 namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
4447
4448 *** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
4449 makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
4450
4451 *** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
4452 c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
4453
4454 *** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
4455 should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
4456 package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
4457 variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
4458
4459 ** Changes to hippie-expand.
4460
4461 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
4462 non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
4463 which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
4464
4465 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
4466 non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
4467 expanding dynamically.
4468
4469 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
4470 non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
4471
4472 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
4473 non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
4474 this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
4475 expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
4476
4477 *** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
4478
4479 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
4480
4481 *** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
4482 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
4483 automatic key generation. This replaces variable
4484 bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
4485 against the first word in the title.
4486
4487 *** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
4488 capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
4489 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
4490 lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
4491 lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
4492 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
4493
4494 *** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
4495 generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
4496 replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
4497 bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
4498
4499 ** Changes in vcursor.el.
4500
4501 *** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
4502 and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
4503 variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
4504 entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
4505 `vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
4506 in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
4507
4508 *** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
4509 Editing group once the package is loaded.
4510
4511 *** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
4512 generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
4513 vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
4514
4515 *** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
4516 vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
4517
4518 ** Ispell changes.
4519
4520 *** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
4521 buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
4522 are identified by syntax tables in effect.
4523
4524 *** Generic region skipping implemented.
4525 A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
4526 and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
4527 defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
4528 include:
4529
4530 o URLs are automatically skipped
4531 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
4532
4533 *** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
4534
4535 ** Changes to RefTeX mode
4536
4537 RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
4538 large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
4539 re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
4540 section `Optimizations' in the manual.
4541
4542 *** New recursive parser.
4543
4544 The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
4545 entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
4546 recursive parser scans the individual files.
4547
4548 *** Parsing only part of a document.
4549
4550 Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
4551 partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
4552 the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
4553
4554 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
4555
4556 *** Storing parsing information in a file.
4557
4558 This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
4559
4560 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
4561
4562 *** Using multiple selection buffers
4563
4564 If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
4565 for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
4566
4567 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
4568
4569 *** References to external documents.
4570
4571 The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
4572 documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
4573 documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
4574 macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
4575 RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
4576 the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
4577 The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
4578
4579 *** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
4580
4581 The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
4582 and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
4583
4584 Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
4585 the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
4586
4587 *** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
4588
4589 The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
4590 buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
4591
4592 *** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
4593
4594 The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
4595 contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
4596 `reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
4597 have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
4598 enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
4599 at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
4600 more.
4601
4602 *** Support for the varioref package
4603
4604 The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
4605
4606 *** New hooks
4607
4608 Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
4609 and citations are created. These hooks are
4610 `reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
4611 `reftex-format-cite-function'.
4612
4613 *** Citations outside LaTeX
4614
4615 The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
4616 a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
4617
4618 *** Short context is no longer fontified.
4619
4620 The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
4621 fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
4622 fontified, use
4623
4624 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
4625
4626 ** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
4627 With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
4628 the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
4629 directories that contain the same file name.
4630
4631 Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
4632 Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
4633 file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
4634 Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
4635 have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
4636 names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
4637 directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
4638 directory.
4639
4640 ** New modes and packages
4641
4642 *** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
4643 It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
4644 it, but some do not.
4645
4646 *** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
4647 code.
4648
4649 *** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
4650 current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
4651 around in a buffer.
4652
4653 Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
4654
4655 *** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
4656 uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
4657 be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
4658 established system of notation similar to Chess.
4659
4660 *** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
4661 documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
4662 guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
4663
4664 *** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
4665 available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
4666 system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
4667 simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
4668 functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
4669 the like.
4670
4671 *** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
4672 identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
4673
4674 *** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
4675 within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
4676 used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
4677 the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
4678
4679 *** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
4680
4681 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
4682 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
4683 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
4684 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
4685 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
4686 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
4687 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
4688 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
4689 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
4690 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
4691 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
4692
4693 Platform-specific modes:
4694
4695 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
4696 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
4697 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
4698 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
4699 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
4700 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
4701 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
4702 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
4703 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
4704 \f
4705 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
4706
4707 ** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
4708 use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
4709 That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
4710 Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
4711
4712 Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
4713 you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
4714 consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
4715
4716 ** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
4717 and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
4718 specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
4719 searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
4720
4721 ** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
4722 multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
4723 character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
4724 environment.
4725
4726 ** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
4727 take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
4728 string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
4729 current input method for reading this one event.
4730
4731 ** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
4732 now control whether to output certain characters as
4733 backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
4734 non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
4735 characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
4736 in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
4737 \f
4738 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
4739
4740 ** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
4741 of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
4742
4743 ** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
4744 in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
4745 always increases point by 1.
4746
4747 The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
4748 considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
4749
4750 See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
4751
4752 ** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
4753 Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
4754 default value changed. For example,
4755
4756 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
4757 :type 'integer
4758 :group 'foo
4759 :version "20.3")
4760
4761 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
4762 :version "20.3")
4763
4764 If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
4765 default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
4766 is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
4767 `:version' in the top level group.
4768
4769 This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
4770
4771 ** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
4772 starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
4773
4774 However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
4775 symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
4776 support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
4777 to themselves.
4778
4779 If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
4780 this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
4781 values whatever.
4782
4783 ** There is a new debugger command, R.
4784 It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
4785 in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
4786
4787 ** Frame-local variables.
4788
4789 You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
4790 the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
4791 local bindings for that variable.
4792
4793 These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
4794 frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
4795 modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
4796 parameter name.
4797
4798 Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
4799 Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
4800 active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
4801 that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
4802
4803 It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
4804 clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
4805 very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
4806 through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
4807
4808 ** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
4809 "symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
4810 evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
4811 makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
4812 See the documentation in sregex.el.
4813
4814 ** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
4815 is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
4816 parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
4817 The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
4818
4819 ** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
4820 If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
4821
4822 ** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
4823 known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
4824 define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
4825
4826 ** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
4827 when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
4828 it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
4829 history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
4830
4831 The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
4832 return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
4833 empty input.
4834
4835 ** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
4836 for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
4837 `iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
4838 Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
4839 `read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
4840
4841 ** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
4842 echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
4843 a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
4844 default password to use if the user enters nothing.
4845
4846 ** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
4847 specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
4848 function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
4849 place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
4850 non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
4851
4852 ** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
4853 If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
4854 up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
4855 end of the window, even if this requires computation.
4856
4857 ** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
4858 which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
4859 If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
4860
4861 ** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
4862 holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
4863 was directed to display this buffer.
4864
4865 ** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
4866 with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
4867 describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
4868 other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
4869 set-window-configuration.
4870
4871 ** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
4872 window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
4873 positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
4874 windows and the choice of buffers to display.
4875
4876 ** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
4877 override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
4878 look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
4879
4880 If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
4881 non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
4882 map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
4883
4884 minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
4885 and it is meant to be set by major modes.
4886
4887 ** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
4888 except that it discards all text properties from the result.
4889
4890 ** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
4891 USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
4892 floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
4893
4894 ** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
4895 to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
4896 in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
4897 it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
4898
4899 ** Menu changes
4900
4901 *** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
4902 keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
4903 better supported.
4904
4905 The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
4906 a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
4907 you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
4908 can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
4909 then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
4910
4911 *** A new format for menu items is supported.
4912
4913 In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
4914 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
4915 defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
4916 starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
4917
4918 The format is:
4919 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
4920 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
4921 where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
4922 string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
4923 The supported properties include
4924
4925 :enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
4926 item is enabled.
4927 :visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
4928 item should appear in the menu.
4929 :filter FILTER-FN
4930 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
4931 which will be REAL-BINDING.
4932 It should return a binding to use instead.
4933 :keys DESCRIPTION
4934 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
4935 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
4936 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
4937 :key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
4938 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
4939 keyboard binding.
4940 :key-sequence nil
4941 This means that the command normally has no
4942 keyboard equivalent.
4943 :help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
4944 :button (TYPE . SELECTED)
4945 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
4946 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
4947 value says whether this button is currently selected.
4948
4949 Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
4950 Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
4951
4952 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
4953
4954 ** New event types
4955
4956 *** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
4957 mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
4958 corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
4959 which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
4960
4961 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
4962
4963 where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
4964 same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
4965 indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
4966 negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
4967 the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
4968 forward, away from the user.
4969
4970 As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
4971
4972 *** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
4973 files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
4974 and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
4975 filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
4976 loaded into Emacs. The format is:
4977
4978 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
4979
4980 where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
4981 same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
4982 that were dragged and dropped.
4983
4984 As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
4985
4986 ** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
4987
4988 *** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
4989 any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
4990 to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
4991
4992 *** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
4993 can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
4994 that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
4995
4996 *** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
4997 in Emacs 19 and before.
4998
4999 The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
5000 The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
5001
5002 *** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
5003 buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
5004 unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
5005 representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
5006
5007 This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
5008 as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
5009 viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
5010 one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
5011 will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
5012
5013 This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
5014 representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
5015 (including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
5016 consistent with the new representation.
5017
5018 *** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
5019 representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
5020 about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
5021 however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5022
5023 The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
5024 nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
5025 using the table nonascii-translation-table.
5026
5027 *** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
5028 representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
5029 representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5030
5031 The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
5032 loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
5033 is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
5034
5035 *** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5036 which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
5037
5038 *** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5039 which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
5040
5041 *** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
5042 portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
5043 so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
5044 You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
5045
5046 *** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
5047 it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
5048
5049 *** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
5050 convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
5051 buffer or string being searched.
5052
5053 One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
5054 [...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
5055 searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
5056 searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
5057 obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
5058 you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
5059 expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
5060
5061 *** Structure of coding system changed.
5062
5063 All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
5064 by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
5065 which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
5066 as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
5067 vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
5068 your own alias name of a coding system by the function
5069 define-coding-system-alias.
5070
5071 The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
5072 the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
5073 access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
5074 pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
5075 character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
5076 safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
5077 'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
5078 `iso-8859-1'.
5079
5080 Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
5081 The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
5082 coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
5083 (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
5084
5085 Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
5086 also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
5087 are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
5088 the other character sets and read it back correctly.
5089
5090 *** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
5091 proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
5092 This function requires a user interaction.
5093
5094 *** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
5095 find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
5096 select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
5097 systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
5098 a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
5099 select-safe-coding-system.
5100
5101 *** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
5102 decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
5103 last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
5104 was done.
5105
5106 *** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
5107 used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
5108 coding systems used by some specific language environment.
5109
5110 *** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
5111 return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
5112 characters are found, they now return a list of single element
5113 `undecided' or its subsidiaries.
5114
5115 *** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
5116 coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
5117 coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
5118 converted.
5119
5120 *** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
5121 coding system for communicating with other X clients.
5122
5123 *** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
5124 character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
5125 character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
5126 each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
5127 either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
5128 range of characters.
5129
5130 *** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
5131 Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
5132
5133 *** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
5134 in the current buffer at position POS.
5135
5136 *** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
5137 input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
5138 function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
5139 character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
5140 event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
5141 binding input-method-function to nil.
5142
5143 The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
5144 method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
5145 input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
5146 the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
5147 not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
5148
5149 The input method function is not called when reading the second and
5150 subsequent events of a key sequence.
5151
5152 *** You can customize any language environment by using
5153 set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
5154
5155 The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
5156 customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
5157 instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
5158 environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
5159 exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
5160 \f
5161 * Changes in Emacs 20.1
5162
5163 ** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
5164 options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
5165 at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
5166 tree structure.
5167
5168 M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
5169 user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
5170
5171 With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
5172 session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
5173 in your .emacs file.)
5174
5175 ** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
5176 You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
5177
5178 ** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
5179 This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
5180
5181 ** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
5182 immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
5183 kills the region.
5184
5185 The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
5186 delete the character before point, as usual.
5187
5188 ** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
5189 on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
5190 by setting search-highlight to nil.)
5191
5192 ** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
5193 insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
5194 the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
5195 onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
5196 history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
5197 past.)
5198
5199 ** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
5200 This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
5201 in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
5202 TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
5203 makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
5204
5205 As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
5206 and is an alias for it.
5207
5208 If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
5209 use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
5210
5211 ** Scrolling changes
5212
5213 *** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
5214 position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
5215
5216 In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
5217 on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
5218 where it started.
5219
5220 *** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
5221 move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
5222 screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
5223 does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
5224
5225 *** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
5226 top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
5227 comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
5228 recenters the window.
5229
5230 ** International character set support (MULE)
5231
5232 Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
5233 including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
5234 Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
5235 Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
5236 features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
5237 MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
5238
5239 Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
5240 coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
5241 character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
5242 variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
5243 into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
5244
5245 Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
5246 generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
5247 supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
5248 language, to make it possible to type them.
5249
5250 The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
5251 character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
5252
5253 The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
5254 to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
5255
5256 You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
5257
5258 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
5259
5260 Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
5261 characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
5262 argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
5263 already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
5264 characters for their work until they want to change.
5265
5266 *** Input methods
5267
5268 An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
5269 specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
5270 has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
5271 the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
5272 support several input methods.
5273
5274 The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
5275 another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
5276 work.
5277
5278 A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
5279 characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
5280 composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
5281 consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
5282 sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
5283 letter.
5284
5285 The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
5286 by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
5287 First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
5288 marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
5289 mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
5290
5291 None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
5292 they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
5293 phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
5294 converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
5295
5296 Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
5297 word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
5298 typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
5299 the first guess is wrong.
5300
5301 *** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
5302 turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
5303
5304 If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
5305 byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
5306 they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
5307 the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
5308
5309 However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
5310 use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
5311 includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
5312 translate automatically to and from either one.
5313
5314 *** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
5315
5316 Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
5317 file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
5318 sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
5319 what you want.
5320
5321 If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
5322 example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
5323 system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
5324 multibyte characters in that buffer.
5325
5326 If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
5327 character conversion as well.
5328
5329 *** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
5330
5331 A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
5332 Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
5333 requires using many fonts.
5334
5335 Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
5336 collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
5337
5338 A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
5339 the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
5340 have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
5341 you would use a font.
5342
5343 If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
5344 specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
5345 display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
5346
5347 The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
5348 (that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
5349 characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
5350 or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
5351 and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
5352
5353 *** Defining fontsets.
5354
5355 Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
5356 chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
5357 with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
5358
5359 Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
5360 of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
5361 `fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
5362 standard fontset are created automatically.
5363
5364 If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
5365 argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
5366 FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
5367 with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
5368 name is `fontset-startup'.
5369
5370 Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
5371 The resource value should have this form:
5372 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
5373 FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
5374 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
5375 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
5376 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
5377 The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
5378 of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
5379 CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
5380 FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
5381
5382 Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
5383 last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
5384 You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
5385
5386 For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
5387 font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
5388 following resource,
5389 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
5390 the font for ASCII is generated as below:
5391 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
5392 Here is the substitution rule:
5393 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
5394 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
5395 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
5396 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
5397 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
5398
5399 The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
5400 fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
5401 that function explicitly to create a fontset.
5402
5403 With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
5404 like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
5405 name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
5406 fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
5407 fontsets.
5408
5409 *** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
5410 defaults for a particular choice of language.
5411
5412 Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
5413 method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
5414 visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
5415 already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
5416 language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
5417 system for new files that you create.
5418
5419 It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
5420 set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
5421 whole Emacs session.
5422
5423 For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
5424 chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
5425 with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
5426
5427 *** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
5428 specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
5429 specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
5430 the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
5431 coding systems that Emacs supports.
5432
5433 *** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
5434 lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
5435 This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
5436 After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
5437 is used for *the immediately following command*.
5438
5439 So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
5440 write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
5441
5442 If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
5443 then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
5444
5445 For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
5446 visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
5447
5448 *** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
5449 construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
5450 to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
5451 specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
5452 of the file.
5453
5454 *** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
5455 the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
5456 code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
5457 translated into that character code.
5458
5459 This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
5460 various countries to support the languages of those countries.
5461
5462 By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
5463
5464 *** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
5465 the coding system for keyboard input.
5466
5467 Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
5468 with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
5469 some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
5470
5471 By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
5472
5473 Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
5474 input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
5475 translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
5476 to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
5477 designed to work with terminals.
5478
5479 *** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
5480 specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
5481 This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
5482 has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
5483 translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
5484 in the corresponding buffer.
5485
5486 By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
5487
5488 *** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
5489 to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
5490 It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
5491
5492 *** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
5493 an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
5494 command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
5495 want to use.
5496
5497 C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
5498 method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
5499
5500 *** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
5501 layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
5502 remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
5503 which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
5504
5505 *** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
5506 the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
5507 related information.
5508
5509 *** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
5510 HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
5511 scripts.
5512
5513 *** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
5514 information about the support for a particular language.
5515 You specify the language as an argument.
5516
5517 *** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
5518 the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
5519 first dash.
5520
5521 A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
5522 (except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
5523 whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
5524 1 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
5525
5526 A alternativnyj (Russian)
5527 B big5 (Chinese)
5528 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
5529 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
5530 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
5531 E euc-japan (Japanese)
5532 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
5533 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
5534 K euc-korea (Korean)
5535 R koi8 (Russian)
5536 Q tibetan
5537 S shift_jis (Japanese)
5538 T lao
5539 T tis620 (Thai)
5540 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
5541 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
5542 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
5543 v viqr (Vietnamese)
5544 z hz (Chinese)
5545
5546 When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
5547 two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
5548 coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
5549 keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
5550
5551 *** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
5552 conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
5553
5554 When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
5555 into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
5556 rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
5557 Rmail files themselves.
5558
5559 *** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
5560 conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
5561
5562 Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
5563 for sending mail:
5564
5565 - If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
5566 - Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
5567 - Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
5568 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
5569 - Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
5570
5571 *** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
5572 to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
5573 Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
5574 translations.
5575
5576 ** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
5577 of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
5578 insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
5579 without any conversion.
5580
5581 ** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
5582 You can now specify any number of octal digits.
5583 RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
5584 any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
5585
5586 ** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
5587 functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
5588
5589 Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
5590 Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
5591
5592 Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
5593 mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
5594
5595 ** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
5596 complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
5597 in the buffer before point.
5598
5599 With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
5600 symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
5601 you are using.
5602
5603 With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
5604 just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
5605
5606 ** File locking works with NFS now.
5607
5608 The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
5609 in the same directory as FILENAME.
5610
5611 This means that collision detection between two different machines now
5612 works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
5613 can become a bottleneck.
5614
5615 The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
5616 does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
5617 create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
5618 file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
5619 rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
5620 so useful that the change is worth while.
5621
5622 When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
5623 are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
5624 collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
5625 tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
5626
5627 ** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
5628 it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
5629 show-paren-mode.
5630
5631 ** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
5632 selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
5633 delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
5634
5635 ** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
5636 within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
5637 complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
5638
5639 ** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
5640 it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
5641 set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
5642
5643 ** Changes in View mode.
5644
5645 *** Several new commands are available in View mode.
5646 Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
5647
5648 *** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
5649 view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
5650
5651 *** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
5652 previous state.
5653
5654 *** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
5655 scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
5656
5657 *** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
5658 non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
5659 not just the selected window.
5660
5661 *** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
5662 read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
5663 turns View mode on or off.
5664
5665 *** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
5666 how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
5667 delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
5668
5669 ** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
5670 now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
5671
5672 ** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
5673 has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
5674 presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
5675 which version to compare with.
5676
5677 ** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
5678 blocks if a match is inside the block.
5679
5680 The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
5681 is outside the block. By customizing the variable
5682 isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
5683 shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
5684
5685 By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
5686 of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
5687 blocks, all of them or none.
5688
5689 ** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
5690 current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
5691 confirmation first.
5692
5693 ** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
5694 now changes the major mode according to that file name.
5695 However, the mode will not be changed if
5696 (1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
5697 (2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
5698 not suitable for ordinary files, or
5699 (3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
5700
5701 This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
5702
5703 However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
5704 these commands do not change the major mode.
5705
5706 ** M-x occur changes.
5707
5708 *** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
5709 it performs a case-sensitive search.
5710
5711 *** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
5712 if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
5713 using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
5714
5715 ** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
5716 in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
5717 window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
5718 that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
5719 buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
5720
5721 ** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
5722 after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
5723 appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
5724 come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
5725
5726 ** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
5727 selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
5728 buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
5729
5730 ** Outline mode changes.
5731
5732 *** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
5733
5734 *** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
5735
5736 ** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
5737 you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
5738 Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
5739 was already active.
5740
5741 The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
5742 unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
5743 get confused by it.
5744
5745 If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
5746 set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
5747
5748 ** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
5749
5750 *** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
5751 conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
5752 character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
5753 including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
5754
5755 The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
5756 mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
5757 copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
5758
5759 *** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
5760 are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
5761 values.
5762
5763 `dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
5764 case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
5765 `dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
5766 case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
5767
5768 ** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
5769 certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
5770 can be. The default value is 30.
5771
5772 ** Changes in Mail mode.
5773
5774 *** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
5775 Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
5776 composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
5777 `mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
5778 `sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
5779 behavior.
5780
5781 C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
5782 compose-mail-other-frame.
5783
5784 *** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
5785 the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
5786 replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
5787 buffer that shows the original message.
5788
5789 *** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
5790 with separator lines around the contents.
5791
5792 *** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
5793 in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
5794 definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
5795 need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
5796
5797 *** New features in the mail-complete command.
5798
5799 **** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
5800 for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
5801 controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
5802 Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
5803
5804 **** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
5805 to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
5806 /etc/passwd.
5807
5808 **** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
5809 to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
5810 /etc/passwd.
5811
5812 ** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
5813 special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
5814 directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
5815 reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
5816
5817 Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
5818 when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
5819 be taken to be magic.
5820
5821 ** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
5822 files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
5823 available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
5824
5825 M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
5826 (-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
5827
5828 ** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
5829 suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
5830
5831 In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
5832
5833 new key dired.el binding old key
5834 ------- ---------------- -------
5835 * c dired-change-marks c
5836 * m dired-mark m
5837 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
5838 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
5839 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
5840 * u dired-unmark u
5841 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
5842 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
5843 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
5844 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
5845 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
5846 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
5847
5848 ** Rmail changes.
5849
5850 *** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
5851 saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
5852 chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
5853 each time you run it.
5854
5855 *** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
5856 whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
5857
5858 *** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
5859 messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
5860 means to move in the opposite direction.
5861
5862 *** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
5863 you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
5864
5865 *** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
5866 just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
5867 It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
5868 can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
5869 for output.
5870
5871 ** Gnus changes.
5872
5873 *** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
5874
5875 *** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
5876 Gnus.
5877
5878 *** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
5879 `and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
5880
5881 *** Article washing status can be displayed in the
5882 article mode line.
5883
5884 *** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
5885
5886 *** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
5887
5888 (setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
5889
5890 *** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
5891 are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
5892 `gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
5893
5894 *** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
5895
5896 *** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
5897
5898 *** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
5899 See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
5900
5901 *** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
5902 Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
5903 used to pick articles.
5904
5905 *** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
5906 another have been added.
5907
5908 `M-x gnus-change-server'
5909
5910 *** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
5911 generating lines in buffers.
5912
5913 *** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
5914 `M-C-_'.
5915
5916 *** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
5917
5918 *** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
5919
5920 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
5921
5922 *** Scores can be decayed.
5923
5924 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
5925
5926 *** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
5927 Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
5928
5929 *** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
5930 the native server.
5931
5932 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
5933
5934 *** A new command for reading collections of documents
5935 (nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
5936
5937 *** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
5938
5939 *** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
5940 even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
5941
5942 *** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
5943 (DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
5944
5945 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
5946 a group.
5947
5948 *** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
5949 sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
5950
5951 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
5952
5953 *** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
5954
5955 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
5956
5957 *** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
5958
5959 Use the `Y c' command.
5960
5961 *** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
5962
5963 *** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
5964
5965 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
5966
5967 *** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
5968 from incoming mail before saving the mail.
5969
5970 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
5971
5972 *** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
5973
5974 *** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
5975 the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
5976
5977 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
5978
5979 Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
5980 and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
5981 from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
5982 hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
5983 this issue.)
5984
5985 Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
5986 automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
5987 particular news group. This can be done by:
5988
5989 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
5990
5991 Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
5992 of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
5993 "XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
5994 system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
5995 for reading and posting).
5996
5997 CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
5998 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
5999 Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
6000 newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
6001 there.
6002
6003 Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
6004 default. Here are some of these default settings:
6005
6006 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
6007 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
6008 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
6009 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
6010 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
6011
6012 When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
6013 the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
6014
6015 ** CC mode changes.
6016
6017 *** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
6018 code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
6019 values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
6020 this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
6021 Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
6022 loaded.
6023
6024 If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
6025 Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
6026 style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
6027 share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
6028 c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
6029 must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
6030
6031 *** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
6032 of the current buffer.
6033
6034 *** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
6035 it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
6036 of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
6037
6038 *** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
6039 style that the Python developers like.
6040
6041 *** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
6042 This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
6043 just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
6044
6045 ** VC Changes [new]
6046
6047 ** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
6048 name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
6049 directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
6050
6051 This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
6052 master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
6053 developers.
6054
6055 You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
6056 RET in a buffer visiting that file.
6057
6058 *** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
6059 other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
6060 writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
6061 calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
6062
6063 *** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
6064 version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
6065
6066 ** Calendar changes.
6067
6068 A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
6069 of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
6070 for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
6071
6072 ** ps-print changes
6073
6074 There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
6075
6076 *** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
6077
6078 The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
6079 formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
6080 `a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
6081 `ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
6082 It defaults to `letter'.
6083 If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
6084
6085 The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
6086 of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
6087 non-nil means "landscape" mode.
6088
6089 The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
6090 It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
6091 It defaults to 1.
6092
6093 *** Horizontal layout
6094
6095 The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
6096 `ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
6097 All are measured in points.
6098
6099 *** Vertical layout
6100
6101 The vertical layout is determined by the variables
6102 `ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
6103 All are measured in points.
6104
6105 *** Headers
6106
6107 If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
6108 `ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
6109 margin above the text.
6110
6111 If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
6112 framing box is printed around the header.
6113
6114 The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
6115 `ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
6116
6117 The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
6118 `ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
6119 `ps-header-font-size'.
6120
6121 *** Font managing
6122
6123 The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
6124 used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
6125 `ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
6126 elements to this alist.
6127
6128 The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
6129 for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
6130
6131 ** hideshow changes.
6132
6133 *** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
6134 C++, ; for lisp).
6135
6136 *** Support for java-mode added.
6137
6138 *** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
6139 in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
6140
6141 *** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
6142 the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
6143 way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
6144
6145 *** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
6146 robust and a lot faster.
6147
6148 *** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
6149
6150 *** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
6151 to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
6152 documentation for more details.
6153
6154 ** Changes in Enriched mode.
6155
6156 *** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
6157 filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
6158 of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
6159 use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
6160 the next time unless the fill-column is different.
6161
6162 *** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
6163 distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
6164 as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
6165 as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
6166
6167 ** Font Lock mode
6168
6169 *** Custom support
6170
6171 The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
6172 font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
6173 faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
6174 group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
6175 your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
6176 consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
6177
6178 You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
6179
6180 *** Maximum decoration
6181
6182 Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
6183 default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
6184 of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
6185 supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
6186 to get the old behavior.
6187
6188 *** New support
6189
6190 Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
6191
6192 Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
6193 support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
6194
6195 *** Configurable support
6196
6197 Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
6198 additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
6199 c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
6200 java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
6201 list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
6202 of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
6203 convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
6204
6205 Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
6206 way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
6207 it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
6208
6209 *** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
6210
6211 You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
6212 highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
6213 for any mode.
6214
6215 For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
6216
6217 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
6218
6219 in your ~/.emacs.
6220
6221 *** New faces
6222
6223 Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
6224 font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
6225 distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
6226 to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
6227
6228 *** Changes to fast-lock support mode
6229
6230 The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
6231 cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
6232 same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
6233
6234 *** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
6235
6236 The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
6237 according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
6238 the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
6239 non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
6240 refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
6241 the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
6242 Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
6243
6244 This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
6245 For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
6246 this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
6247 refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
6248 containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
6249 the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
6250
6251 As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
6252
6253 Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
6254 Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
6255 Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
6256 new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
6257
6258 If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
6259 settings.
6260
6261 ** Ada mode changes.
6262
6263 *** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
6264 If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
6265 procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
6266 you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
6267 stubs.
6268
6269 *** There are two new commands:
6270 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
6271 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
6272
6273 The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
6274 `ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
6275 `ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
6276
6277 *** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
6278 is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
6279 Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
6280
6281 *** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
6282 formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
6283 places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
6284 space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
6285
6286 ** Scheme mode changes.
6287
6288 *** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
6289 mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
6290 for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
6291 with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
6292 have any effect.
6293
6294 If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
6295 still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
6296 scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
6297 variables as buffer-local variables.
6298
6299 *** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
6300 Use M-x dsssl-mode.
6301
6302 ** Changes to the emacsclient program
6303
6304 *** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
6305 USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
6306 associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
6307 can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
6308
6309 *** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
6310 it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
6311 buffer in Emacs.
6312
6313 *** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
6314 use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
6315 ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
6316 option takes precedence.
6317
6318 ** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
6319 constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
6320 (in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
6321
6322 ** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
6323 which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
6324 the current defun.
6325
6326 ** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
6327 following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
6328
6329 ** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
6330 and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
6331 necessary).
6332
6333 ** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
6334 if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
6335 these register values no longer become completely useless.
6336 If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
6337 asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
6338 it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
6339
6340 ** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
6341 example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
6342 be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
6343 you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
6344
6345 You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
6346 variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
6347 file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
6348 revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
6349 only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
6350
6351 ** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
6352 since it applies only to the current frame.
6353
6354 ** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
6355 file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
6356 and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
6357
6358 This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
6359 multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
6360 variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
6361 tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
6362 instead of just the file you are editing.
6363
6364 ** RefTeX mode
6365
6366 RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
6367 and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
6368 different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
6369 multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
6370 turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
6371
6372 C-c ( reftex-label
6373 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
6374 knows which kind of label is needed.
6375
6376 C-c ) reftex-reference
6377 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
6378 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
6379
6380 C-c [ reftex-citation
6381 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
6382 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
6383
6384 C-c & reftex-view-crossref
6385 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
6386
6387 C-c = reftex-toc
6388 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
6389 can quickly jump to every section.
6390
6391 Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
6392 commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
6393 Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
6394 reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
6395 C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
6396
6397 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
6398
6399 *** Info documentation is now available.
6400
6401 *** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
6402 both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
6403
6404 *** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
6405 bibtex-user-optional-fields.
6406
6407 *** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
6408 (use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
6409
6410 *** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
6411 entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
6412 appropriate functions.
6413
6414 *** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
6415 entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
6416
6417 *** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
6418 been cleaned.
6419
6420 *** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
6421 bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
6422
6423 *** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
6424 shall be delimited.
6425
6426 *** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
6427 bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
6428 bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
6429
6430 *** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
6431 field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
6432 prefixed with `ALT'.
6433
6434 *** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
6435 bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
6436 formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
6437 documentation).
6438
6439 *** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
6440 documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
6441 for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
6442
6443 *** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
6444 comma should be inserted at end of last field.
6445
6446 *** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
6447 alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
6448 signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
6449
6450 *** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
6451
6452 *** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
6453
6454 *** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
6455 from alien sources.
6456
6457 *** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
6458 to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
6459 crossref entries.
6460
6461 *** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
6462 region.
6463
6464 *** Added support for imenu.
6465
6466 *** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
6467 of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
6468 `compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
6469 `next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
6470
6471 *** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
6472 from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
6473
6474 ** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
6475
6476 ** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
6477
6478 ** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
6479 functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
6480 Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
6481 as an argument.
6482
6483 When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
6484 and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
6485
6486 ** browse-url changes
6487
6488 *** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
6489 Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
6490 (browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
6491 non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
6492 customization variables.
6493
6494 *** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
6495
6496 *** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
6497 lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
6498 (e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
6499
6500 ** Changes in Ediff
6501
6502 *** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
6503 pops up the Info file for this command.
6504
6505 *** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
6506 the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
6507 merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
6508 directories).
6509
6510 *** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
6511 and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
6512 files in the same directory.
6513
6514 *** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
6515 The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
6516 related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
6517
6518 ** Changes in Viper
6519
6520 *** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
6521 *** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
6522 instead of vip-.
6523 *** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
6524 *** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
6525 Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
6526 *** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
6527 *** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
6528 *** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
6529 color when Viper is in insert state.
6530 *** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
6531 Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
6532 viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
6533
6534 ** Etags changes.
6535
6536 *** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
6537 default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
6538 Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
6539 variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
6540 not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
6541
6542 *** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
6543
6544 *** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
6545 constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
6546
6547 *** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
6548 recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
6549 In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
6550
6551 *** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
6552 C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
6553 recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
6554 methods and protocols.
6555
6556 *** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
6557 .cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
6558 column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
6559 paragraph name.
6560
6561 *** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
6562 an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
6563 at least M times and as many as N times.
6564
6565 ** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
6566 in files has changed slightly.
6567
6568 With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
6569 time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
6570 This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
6571 with old time-stamp-format values.
6572
6573 In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
6574 (`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
6575 This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
6576 reasons.
6577
6578 In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
6579 natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
6580 fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
6581 (`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
6582 time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
6583 specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
6584
6585 Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
6586 case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
6587 truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
6588
6589 The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
6590 being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
6591 future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
6592 recommended now will continue to work then.
6593
6594 See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
6595 details.
6596
6597 ** There are some additional major modes:
6598
6599 dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
6600 m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
6601 meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
6602
6603 ** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
6604 copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
6605 into Emacs.
6606
6607 ** New Lisp packages include:
6608
6609 *** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
6610
6611 *** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
6612 be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
6613
6614 *** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
6615
6616 *** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
6617 in shell buffers.
6618
6619 *** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
6620 See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
6621 and `elint-defun'.
6622
6623 *** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
6624 meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
6625 ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
6626 strings or comments.
6627
6628 These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
6629 abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
6630 you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
6631 insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
6632 at these points.
6633
6634 *** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
6635 can visit them by short forms of their names.
6636
6637 *** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
6638 Emacs Lisp function at point.
6639
6640 *** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
6641
6642 *** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
6643 switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
6644
6645 *** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
6646
6647 *** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
6648
6649 *** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
6650
6651 *** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
6652 from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
6653
6654 *** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
6655 You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
6656 inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
6657 original place after inserting the copy.
6658
6659 *** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
6660 on the buffer.
6661
6662 You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
6663 velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
6664 (with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
6665
6666 Enable mouse-drag with:
6667 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
6668 -or-
6669 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
6670
6671 *** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
6672 mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
6673
6674 *** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
6675 It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
6676
6677 *** ogonek
6678
6679 The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
6680 Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
6681 platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
6682 TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
6683 ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
6684 prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
6685 instance) and vice versa.
6686
6687 To use this package load it using
6688 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
6689 Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
6690 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
6691 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
6692 The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
6693 ways of customization in `.emacs'.
6694
6695 *** Interface to ph.
6696
6697 Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
6698
6699 The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
6700 services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
6701 these servers.
6702
6703 *** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
6704
6705 *** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
6706 You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
6707 while the real cursor does not move.
6708
6709 *** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
6710 for visiting your favorite web sites.
6711
6712 *** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
6713 so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
6714
6715 ** movemail change
6716
6717 Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
6718 mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
6719 supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
6720 user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
6721
6722 This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
6723 \f
6724 * Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
6725
6726 ** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
6727
6728 Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
6729 end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
6730 Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
6731 file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
6732 file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
6733
6734 To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
6735 C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
6736 coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
6737 specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
6738 LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
6739 save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
6740 \f
6741 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
6742
6743 ** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
6744 Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
6745 vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
6746 Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
6747
6748 ** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
6749 to start with w32- instead of win32-.
6750
6751 In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
6752 don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
6753 "win".
6754
6755 ** Basic Lisp changes
6756
6757 *** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
6758 evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
6759
6760 *** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
6761 be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
6762 or by the user.
6763
6764 The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
6765
6766 *** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
6767
6768 (when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
6769 (unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
6770
6771 *** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
6772 usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
6773 its argument.
6774
6775 *** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
6776
6777 *** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
6778
6779 *** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
6780
6781 *** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
6782 error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
6783 include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
6784 `format' function.
6785
6786 *** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
6787 or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
6788 whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
6789
6790 *** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
6791 either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
6792 adding one of these suffixes.
6793
6794 *** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
6795 which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
6796 If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
6797
6798 We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
6799 because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
6800
6801 *** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
6802
6803 *** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
6804 You must load the `cl' library to define it.
6805
6806 *** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
6807 conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
6808
6809 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
6810
6811 BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
6812 BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
6813
6814 *** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
6815 choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
6816 restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
6817 works using `save-current-buffer'.
6818
6819 *** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
6820 write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
6821 of the last form.
6822
6823 *** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
6824 which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
6825 last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
6826 as the last form.
6827
6828 *** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
6829 characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
6830 matches.
6831
6832 For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
6833
6834 *** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
6835 with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
6836 Then it returns that string.
6837
6838 For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
6839
6840 (with-output-to-string
6841 (princ "The buffer is ")
6842 (princ (buffer-name)))
6843
6844 returns "The buffer is foo".
6845
6846 ** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
6847 is non-nil.
6848
6849 These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
6850 buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
6851 characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
6852
6853 *** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
6854 a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
6855
6856 Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
6857 character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
6858 Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
6859 position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
6860 characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
6861 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
6862
6863 ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
6864 Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
6865 non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
6866 characters".
6867
6868 The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
6869 through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
6870 "leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
6871 range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
6872 leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
6873
6874 *** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
6875 (forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
6876 multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
6877 character, which may be more than one buffer position.
6878
6879 This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
6880 always one buffer position, need to be changed.
6881
6882 However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
6883
6884 *** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
6885 because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
6886 have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
6887 the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
6888 guaranteed.
6889
6890 *** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
6891 between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
6892 character).
6893
6894 When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
6895
6896 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
6897 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
6898 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
6899 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
6900 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
6901
6902 *** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
6903
6904 *** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
6905 `length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
6906 more than the number of characters.
6907
6908 You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
6909 it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
6910 \xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
6911 is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
6912 follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
6913 newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
6914
6915 *** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
6916 and returns a string containing those characters.
6917
6918 *** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
6919 (sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
6920 counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
6921 character, sref signals an error.
6922
6923 *** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
6924 in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
6925 string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
6926
6927 *** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
6928 in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
6929 region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
6930
6931 *** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
6932 the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
6933 to a vector of the characters in it.
6934
6935 *** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
6936 of a string. You call it as follows:
6937
6938 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
6939
6940 This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
6941 STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
6942 This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
6943 Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
6944 it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
6945
6946 *** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
6947 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
6948
6949 *** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
6950 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
6951
6952 *** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
6953 to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
6954 not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
6955 which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
6956
6957 (truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
6958
6959 This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
6960
6961 The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
6962 If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
6963 are not included in the resulting value.
6964
6965 The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
6966 at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
6967 WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
6968 is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
6969
6970 If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
6971 place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
6972 character extends across that column), then the padding character
6973 PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
6974 string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
6975 column START-COLUMN.
6976
6977 *** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
6978 the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
6979 necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
6980 difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
6981 changed text, before the change.
6982
6983 *** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
6984 sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
6985 one character set for each script, not for each language.
6986
6987 **** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
6988
6989 **** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
6990
6991 **** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
6992 set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
6993
6994 **** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
6995 name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
6996 which identify the character within that character set.
6997
6998 **** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
6999 byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
7000 opposite of split-char.
7001
7002 **** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
7003 of all the characters between BEG and END.
7004
7005 **** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
7006 of all the characters in a string.
7007
7008 *** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
7009 and specifying coding systems.
7010
7011 **** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
7012 system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
7013 of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
7014 (Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
7015 and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
7016 as what to do about code conversion.)
7017
7018 **** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
7019 name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
7020
7021 **** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7022 for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7023 except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
7024
7025 Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7026 which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
7027 to match against a file name.
7028
7029 VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7030 a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7031 decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7032 to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7033 systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7034 specifies the coding system for encoding.
7035
7036 If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7037 or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7038
7039 **** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
7040 the coding system to use for network sockets.
7041
7042 Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7043 which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
7044 either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
7045 service names.
7046
7047 VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7048 a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7049 decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7050 to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7051 systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7052 specifies the coding system for encoding.
7053
7054 If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7055 or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7056
7057 **** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7058 for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7059 except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
7060 start the subprocess.
7061
7062 **** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
7063 systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
7064 when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
7065 (OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
7066 to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
7067
7068 **** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
7069 coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
7070 subprocess.
7071
7072 It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
7073 but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
7074 start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
7075 connection permanently or until overridden.
7076
7077 The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
7078 file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
7079 network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
7080 coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
7081 It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
7082 system for one operation at a time.
7083
7084 **** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
7085 files, subprocesses or network connections.
7086
7087 **** The function process-coding-system tells you what
7088 coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
7089 The value is a cons cell,
7090 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
7091 where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
7092 the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
7093 input to the subprocess.
7094
7095 **** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
7096 change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
7097
7098 ** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
7099 customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
7100 you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
7101
7102 You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
7103 variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
7104 information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
7105 legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
7106 customization.
7107
7108 Thus, instead of writing
7109
7110 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
7111 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
7112
7113 you would now write this:
7114
7115 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
7116 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
7117 :type 'boolean
7118 :group foo)
7119
7120 The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
7121 two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
7122 describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
7123 for a description of them.
7124
7125 The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
7126 should belong to. You define a new group like this:
7127
7128 (defgroup ispell nil
7129 "Spell checking using Ispell."
7130 :group 'processes)
7131
7132 The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
7133 group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
7134 but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
7135 to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
7136 second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
7137
7138 Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
7139 package should have just one group; a more complex package should
7140 have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
7141 package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
7142 first-level subgroups.
7143
7144 ** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
7145
7146 This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
7147 separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
7148
7149 ** easy-mmode
7150
7151 The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
7152 developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
7153 only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
7154 predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
7155 `easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
7156 `easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
7157
7158 ** Text property changes
7159
7160 *** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
7161 text property.
7162
7163 *** The new functions next-char-property-change and
7164 previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
7165 place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
7166 functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
7167 starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
7168
7169 If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
7170 LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
7171 of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
7172 position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
7173
7174 *** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
7175 value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
7176 is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
7177
7178 ** Changes in invisibility features
7179
7180 *** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
7181 hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
7182 is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
7183 should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
7184 would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
7185 make the overlay visible.
7186
7187 During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
7188 invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
7189 needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
7190 which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
7191 the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
7192 t when it should hide it.
7193
7194 *** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
7195
7196 Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
7197 invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
7198 and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
7199 Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
7200 manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
7201 Here is an example of how to do this:
7202
7203 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
7204 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
7205 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
7206 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
7207
7208 ...
7209 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
7210
7211 ...
7212 ;; When done with the overlays:
7213 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
7214 ;; Or respectively:
7215 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
7216
7217 ** Changes in syntax parsing.
7218
7219 *** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
7220 `parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
7221 obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
7222 `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
7223
7224 If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
7225 is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
7226 used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
7227
7228 When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
7229 character in the buffer is calculated thus:
7230
7231 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
7232 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
7233
7234 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
7235 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
7236 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
7237
7238 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
7239 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
7240 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
7241 determine the syntax type of the character.
7242
7243 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
7244 of the current buffer.
7245
7246 *** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
7247 value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
7248 for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
7249
7250 *** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
7251 and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
7252 only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
7253 character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
7254 another character with the same code (unless quoted).
7255
7256 These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
7257 text property.
7258
7259 *** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
7260 arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
7261 of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
7262
7263 *** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
7264 (and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
7265 element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
7266 nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
7267 string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
7268
7269 *** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
7270 syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
7271 `font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
7272
7273 ** Changes in face features
7274
7275 *** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
7276 if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
7277
7278 *** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
7279 of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
7280
7281 *** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
7282 set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
7283
7284 *** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
7285 set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
7286
7287 *** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
7288 by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
7289 and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
7290 the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
7291 overlay property).
7292
7293 This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
7294 arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
7295
7296 ** Changes in file-handling functions
7297
7298 *** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
7299 directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
7300 they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
7301 is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
7302
7303 This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
7304 begins with ~.
7305
7306 *** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
7307 it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
7308
7309 *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
7310 the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
7311
7312 *** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
7313 as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
7314
7315 *** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
7316 character code conversion as well as other things.
7317
7318 Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
7319 (formerly it did not).
7320
7321 *** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
7322 environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
7323
7324 *** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
7325 instead of constant strings.
7326
7327 *** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
7328 to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
7329 any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
7330
7331 substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
7332 in the same way as before.
7333
7334 *** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
7335 The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
7336 which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
7337
7338 *** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
7339 error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
7340 else, and returns nil.
7341
7342 *** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
7343 directory cannot be listed.
7344
7345 ** Changes in minibuffer input
7346
7347 *** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
7348 read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
7349 additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
7350 argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
7351 ways:
7352
7353 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
7354 It is available through the history command M-n.
7355
7356 *** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
7357 read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
7358 argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
7359 minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
7360 enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
7361
7362 In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
7363 argument in this way.
7364
7365 *** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
7366 from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
7367 minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
7368
7369 ** Echo area features
7370
7371 *** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
7372 echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
7373 minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
7374 after the echo area is cleared.
7375
7376 *** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
7377 in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
7378
7379 ** Keyboard input features
7380
7381 *** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
7382 set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
7383
7384 *** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
7385 received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
7386 by keyboard macros.
7387
7388 ** Frame-related changes
7389
7390 *** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
7391 creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
7392 hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
7393
7394 *** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
7395 the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
7396 has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
7397
7398 *** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
7399 selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
7400 value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
7401 in the selected frame.
7402
7403 *** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
7404 is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
7405 which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
7406
7407 ** X Windows features
7408
7409 *** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
7410 x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
7411 x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
7412
7413 *** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
7414 The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
7415
7416 *** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
7417 MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
7418 A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
7419
7420 If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
7421 it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
7422
7423 ** Subprocess features
7424
7425 *** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
7426 functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
7427 automatically.
7428
7429 *** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
7430 and returns the output from the command as a string.
7431
7432 *** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
7433 and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
7434
7435 ** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
7436 does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
7437
7438 ** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
7439 at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
7440 goes after the other menu items.
7441
7442 ** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
7443 of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
7444 around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
7445 are in use.
7446
7447 The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
7448 series of several changes--if that seems safe.
7449
7450 Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
7451 after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
7452 form.
7453
7454 ** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
7455 is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
7456 but its hook is still run.
7457
7458 ** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
7459 for errors that are handled by condition-case.
7460
7461 If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
7462 regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
7463 useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
7464
7465 This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
7466 are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
7467 filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
7468 warned.
7469
7470 ** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
7471 way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
7472
7473 ** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
7474 integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
7475 functions like display-time.
7476
7477 ** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
7478 name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
7479
7480 ** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
7481 can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
7482 is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
7483
7484 ** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
7485 if there is an error in compilation.
7486
7487 ** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
7488 switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
7489 argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
7490 they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
7491
7492 ** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
7493 Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
7494 the *scratch* buffer.
7495
7496 ** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
7497 The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
7498 where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
7499 e.g., in Font Lock mode.
7500
7501 ** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
7502 and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
7503 It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
7504
7505 ** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
7506 using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
7507 variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
7508 and compose-mail-other-frame.
7509
7510 ** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
7511 can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
7512 full name of the specified user will be returned.
7513
7514 ** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
7515 of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
7516 where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
7517 in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
7518 option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
7519 files at all.
7520
7521 ** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
7522 and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
7523 width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
7524 the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
7525
7526 For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
7527 minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
7528 with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
7529 is how %S normally pads to two positions.
7530
7531 ** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
7532
7533 ** imenu.el changes.
7534
7535 You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
7536 item from menu created by imenu.
7537
7538 An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
7539 #include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
7540 select one of those items.
7541 \f
7542 * Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
7543 \f
7544 * Changes in Emacs 19.33.
7545
7546 ** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
7547 mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
7548
7549 ** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
7550 use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
7551 Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
7552 \f
7553 * Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
7554
7555 ** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
7556 To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
7557
7558 ** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
7559 conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
7560 matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
7561 expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
7562 word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
7563 all caps.
7564
7565 ** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
7566 at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
7567
7568 When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
7569 does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
7570 as in previous Emacs versions.
7571
7572 ** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
7573 non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
7574 time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
7575 frames.
7576
7577 ** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
7578 if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
7579 This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
7580 Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
7581 accident.
7582
7583 ** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
7584 keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
7585 It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
7586 line and then executing the macro.
7587
7588 This command is not new, but was never documented before.
7589
7590 ** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
7591 (something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
7592 characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
7593 characters.
7594
7595 ** Font Lock mode
7596
7597 *** Font Lock support modes
7598
7599 Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
7600 below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
7601 hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
7602 to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
7603 Font Lock mode is enabled.
7604
7605 For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
7606
7607 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
7608
7609 in your ~/.emacs.
7610
7611 *** lazy-lock
7612
7613 The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
7614 only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
7615 becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
7616 Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
7617 occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
7618 buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
7619 Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
7620
7621 To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
7622
7623 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
7624
7625 To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
7626
7627 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7628
7629 *** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
7630 paren and key.
7631
7632 *** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
7633 supported.
7634
7635 ** Gnus changes.
7636
7637 Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
7638 commands and variables have been added. There should be no
7639 significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
7640 previously released version, except in the message composition area.
7641
7642 Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
7643 between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
7644
7645 *** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
7646 variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
7647 obsolete.
7648
7649 *** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
7650 missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
7651
7652 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
7653
7654 *** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
7655
7656 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
7657
7658 *** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
7659 referred.
7660
7661 *** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
7662
7663 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
7664
7665 *** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
7666
7667 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
7668
7669 *** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
7670 buffers.
7671
7672 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
7673
7674 *** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
7675
7676 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
7677
7678 *** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
7679
7680 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
7681
7682 *** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
7683
7684 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
7685
7686 *** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
7687 is possible.
7688
7689 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
7690
7691 *** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
7692 groups of groups.
7693
7694 *** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
7695
7696 *** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
7697 batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
7698
7699 *** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
7700
7701 *** The Gnus cache is much faster.
7702
7703 *** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
7704
7705 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
7706
7707 *** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
7708 expiration times.
7709
7710 *** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
7711
7712 *** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
7713 process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
7714
7715 *** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
7716 articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
7717 bound to keys on the `/' submap.
7718
7719 *** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
7720 articles with the `*' command.
7721
7722 *** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
7723
7724 *** Article headers can be buttonized.
7725
7726 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
7727
7728 *** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
7729
7730 *** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
7731 `nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
7732
7733 *** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
7734 buffer.
7735
7736 *** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
7737
7738 *** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
7739
7740 *** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
7741
7742 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
7743
7744 *** Groups can be made permanently visible.
7745
7746 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
7747
7748 *** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
7749
7750 *** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
7751
7752 *** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
7753
7754 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
7755 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
7756
7757 *** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
7758 refetching.
7759
7760 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
7761
7762 *** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
7763 buffer to allow easier treatment.
7764
7765 *** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
7766
7767 *** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
7768
7769 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
7770
7771 *** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
7772 articles.
7773
7774 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
7775
7776 *** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
7777
7778 *** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
7779 cited text to hide is now customizable.
7780
7781 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
7782
7783 *** Boring headers can be hidden.
7784
7785 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
7786
7787 *** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
7788
7789 *** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
7790
7791 The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
7792 in greater detail.
7793 \f
7794 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
7795
7796 ** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
7797 second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
7798 asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
7799 exists.
7800
7801 ** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
7802 as well as lists.
7803
7804 ** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
7805 of a given keymap.
7806
7807 ** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
7808 given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
7809 keymap or nil.
7810
7811 ** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
7812 an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
7813 name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
7814 menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
7815 equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
7816 alias.
7817 \f
7818 * Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
7819
7820 ** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
7821
7822 Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
7823 This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
7824 was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
7825 far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
7826 pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
7827
7828 For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
7829 you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
7830 `http://www.vtw.org/'.
7831
7832 ** A note about C mode indentation customization.
7833
7834 The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
7835 do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
7836 It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
7837 much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
7838 chapter of the manual for details.
7839
7840 However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
7841 customization variables take effect.
7842
7843 ** Marking with the mouse.
7844
7845 When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
7846 highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
7847 using M-x transient-mark-mode.
7848
7849 ** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
7850
7851 *** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
7852
7853 *** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
7854 to work on NT only and not on 95.)
7855
7856 *** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
7857 in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
7858 you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
7859 application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
7860 applications, these problems are significant.
7861
7862 If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
7863 likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
7864 However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
7865 will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
7866 other DOS application as a subprocess.
7867
7868 Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
7869 You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
7870
7871 If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
7872 subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
7873 have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
7874 Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
7875 separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
7876 Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
7877
7878 ** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
7879
7880 This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
7881 which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
7882 minibuffer contains.
7883
7884 ** `title' frame parameter and resource.
7885
7886 The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
7887 It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
7888 It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
7889 affects just the displayed title of the frame.
7890
7891 The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
7892 it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
7893 and also serves as the default for the displayed title
7894 when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
7895
7896 ** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
7897 enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
7898
7899 ** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
7900 F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
7901 Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
7902
7903 If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
7904 menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
7905 something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
7906 the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
7907
7908 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
7909
7910 ** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
7911 to replace the characters it "deletes".
7912
7913 ** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
7914
7915 ** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
7916 a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
7917 select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
7918 It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
7919 immediately after the selected one.
7920
7921 This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
7922 made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
7923
7924 ** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
7925
7926 Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
7927 directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
7928 If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
7929 Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
7930 recover-session.
7931
7932 You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
7933 auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
7934 will not work.
7935
7936 Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
7937 normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
7938 this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
7939 bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
7940 now that the bug is fixed.
7941
7942 ** Changes to Version Control (VC)
7943
7944 There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
7945 when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
7946 Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
7947 which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
7948
7949 If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
7950 telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
7951 VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
7952 the link is visited and a warning displayed.
7953
7954 ** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
7955 Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
7956 is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
7957
7958 There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
7959 Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
7960 enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
7961 The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
7962 remain normal.
7963
7964 ** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
7965 header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
7966
7967 Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
7968 known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
7969 offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
7970 Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
7971
7972 Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
7973 of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
7974 a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
7975 name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
7976 documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
7977 `mail-directory-stream'.)
7978
7979 ** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
7980 skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
7981 characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
7982 with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
7983
7984 Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
7985 - to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
7986 wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
7987
7988 The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
7989 less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
7990 headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
7991 Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
7992 Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
7993 fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
7994 to a limitation in font-lock).
7995
7996 External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
7997
7998 ** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
7999 buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
8000 buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
8001 this example:
8002
8003 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
8004 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
8005
8006 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8007
8008 *** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
8009
8010 *** Font Lock mode is now supported.
8011
8012 *** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
8013
8014 *** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
8015 entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
8016 will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
8017 isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
8018 (bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
8019 The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
8020
8021 *** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
8022 does the same job.
8023
8024 *** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
8025 "Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
8026
8027 *** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
8028 text.
8029
8030 ** Font Lock mode
8031
8032 *** Global Font Lock mode
8033
8034 Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
8035 new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
8036 font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
8037 turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
8038 on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
8039
8040 For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
8041
8042 (global-font-lock-mode t)
8043
8044 in your ~/.emacs.
8045
8046 *** Local Refontification
8047
8048 In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
8049 However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
8050 those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
8051 command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
8052
8053 In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
8054 (The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
8055 current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
8056 above and below point.
8057
8058 With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
8059
8060 ** Follow mode
8061
8062 Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
8063 buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
8064 side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
8065 they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
8066 split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
8067 follow-mode.
8068
8069 M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
8070
8071 To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
8072 command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
8073
8074 ** hide-show changes.
8075
8076 The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
8077 to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
8078 normal hooks.
8079
8080 ** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
8081 The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
8082
8083 ** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
8084 recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
8085 those that begin a function, record, or macro.
8086
8087 ** MSDOS Changes
8088
8089 *** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
8090 Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
8091
8092 *** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
8093 and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
8094
8095 *** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
8096
8097 *** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
8098 pressing both mouse buttons.
8099
8100 *** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
8101 restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
8102 are:
8103
8104 **** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
8105 now works.
8106
8107 **** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
8108
8109 **** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
8110 implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
8111
8112 **** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
8113
8114 **** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
8115
8116 **** `M-x recover-session' works.
8117
8118 **** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
8119
8120 **** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
8121 \f
8122 * Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
8123
8124 ** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
8125 tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
8126 remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
8127 this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
8128 behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
8129
8130 ** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
8131
8132 The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
8133 not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
8134 need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
8135 be different.
8136
8137 It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
8138 than `system-type'.
8139
8140 See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
8141
8142 ** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
8143 now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
8144
8145 ** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
8146 that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
8147
8148 ** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
8149 no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
8150 reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
8151
8152 The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
8153 to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
8154 like this:
8155
8156 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
8157
8158 SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
8159 It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
8160 becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
8161
8162 REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
8163 seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
8164 means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
8165
8166 *** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
8167 up if too much time passes.
8168
8169 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
8170
8171 This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
8172 If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
8173 of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
8174 form in BODY.
8175
8176 *** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
8177 a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
8178 call looks like this:
8179
8180 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
8181
8182 SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
8183 runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
8184 timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
8185 ARGS.
8186
8187 Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
8188 command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
8189 command.
8190
8191 REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
8192 time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
8193 does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
8194 each time Emacs becomes idle.
8195
8196 If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
8197 idle for SECS seconds.
8198
8199 *** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
8200 all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
8201 programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
8202 instead.
8203
8204 *** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
8205 there is no answer within a certain time.
8206
8207 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
8208
8209 asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
8210 within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
8211 Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
8212
8213 ** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
8214 arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
8215 meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
8216 arguments in between are ignored.
8217
8218 This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
8219 the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
8220
8221 ** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
8222 /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
8223 /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
8224 site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
8225 version.
8226
8227 It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
8228 version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
8229 for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
8230 has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
8231 and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
8232 problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
8233
8234 ** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
8235 .abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
8236 systems with limited file name syntax.
8237
8238 Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
8239 convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
8240 for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
8241 completions.el:
8242
8243 (defvar save-completions-file-name
8244 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
8245 "*The filename to save completions to.")
8246
8247 This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
8248 depends on the operating system, because the definition of
8249 convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
8250 Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
8251 MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
8252
8253 ** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
8254 rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
8255 minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
8256
8257 ** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
8258 marker from its buffer position.
8259
8260 ** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
8261 Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
8262 The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
8263
8264 ** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
8265 that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
8266 condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
8267 of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
8268 matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
8269 regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
8270
8271 This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
8272 errors that happen often during editing.
8273
8274 ** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
8275 into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
8276 puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
8277
8278 ** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
8279 now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
8280
8281 ** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
8282 a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
8283 name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
8284 to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
8285 and not get-buffer-window.
8286
8287 ** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
8288 calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
8289 being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
8290
8291 If you use this feature, you should set the variable
8292 buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
8293 property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
8294 non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
8295 are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
8296 property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
8297 over and over for the same text.
8298
8299 ** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
8300
8301 *** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
8302 in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
8303
8304 ;; @(#) HEADER: text
8305 ;; $HEADER: text $
8306
8307 in addition to the normal
8308
8309 ;; HEADER: text
8310
8311 *** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
8312 checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
8313 lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
8314 \f
8315 * For older news, see the file ONEWS.
8316
8317 ----------------------------------------------------------------------
8318 Copyright information:
8319
8320 Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
8321
8322 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
8323 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
8324 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
8325 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
8326
8327 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
8328 of this document, or of portions of it,
8329 under the above conditions, provided also that they
8330 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
8331 \f
8332 Local variables:
8333 mode: outline
8334 paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
8335 end: